Generated by All in One SEO v4.9.0, this is an llms.txt file, used by LLMs to index the site.

# AppJetty

Help Center

## Sitemaps

- [XML Sitemap](https://docs.appjetty.com/sitemap.xml): Contains all public & indexable URLs for this website.

## Pages

- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Landing](https://docs.appjetty.com/) - This is our knowledge base website specially designed for giving an elaborated overview of our AppJetty solutions like Magento and other verticles as well.
- [Knowledge Base](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledge-base/) - This is our Knowledge base page where you can get answers to your questions related to the Magento, Dynamics, and our other verticle solutions.
- [User Manuals](https://docs.appjetty.com/user-manuals/) - User manuals consists of various manuals that will help you with many tasks. Be it an installation guide of Magento, WooCommers or Addon feature you will find it here.
- [AJ Delivery Date & Shipping](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/order-delivery-date-manager/)
- [Advanced Zipcode Validator](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/zipcode-validator/)
- [Geolocation + Currency Converter](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/geoip/)
- [Language Translator](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/language-translator-2/)
- [Australia Post Shipping Rates](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/australia-post-shipping-rates/)
- [Dropshipping Manager](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/dropshipping-manager/)
- [CommerceXpand](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/commercexpand/)
- [Magento2 Zipcode Validator](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/magento2-zipcode-validator/)
- [Magento2 Mobile App Builder](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/magento2-mobile-app-builder/)
- [Magemob Inventory](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/magemob-inventory/)
- [Magemo Admin](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/magemo-admin/)
- [StarTrack Shipping](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/startrack-shipping/)
- [GeoIP redirect](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/geoip-redirect/)
- [Australia Mypost Shipping for Magento 2](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/australia-mypost-shipping-for-magento-2/)
- [SugarCRM_Survey Rocket V 5.3.1](https://docs.appjetty.com/sugarcrm_survey-rocket-v-5-3-1/)
- [Australia Post Shipping for Magento 2](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/australia-post-shipping-for-magento-2/)
- [Australia Post Parcel Send for Magento2](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/australia-post-parcel-send-for-magento2/)
- [Auto-External Links](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/auto-external-links/)
- [Block Redirection](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/block-redirection/)
- [Content Protection](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/content-protection/)
- [Cookie Bar](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/cookie-bar/)
- [Image Optimizer](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/image-optimizer/)
- [SEO Alt Tags](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/seo-alt-tags/)
- [Currency Converter](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/currency-converter/)
- [Hide from Search](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/hide-from-search/)
- [Announcement Bar](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/announcement-bar/)
- [Product Reviews](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/product-reviews/)
- [Geo Redirection](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/geo-redirection/)
- [Best Seller Protection](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/best-seller-protection/)
- [Facebook Messenger Chat](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/facebook-messenger-chat/)
- [Festival Effects](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/festival-effects/)
- [Bulk Editor](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/bulk-editor/)
- [Product Bundles](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/product-bundles/)
- [Pre Order](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/pre-order/)
- [Sticky Add to Cart](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/sticky-add-to-cart/)
- [Quick buy](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/quick-buy/)
- [Back In-Store Alert](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/back-in-store-alert/)
- [Abandoned Cart Management](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/abandoned-cart-management/)
- [Countdown Timer](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/countdown-timer/)
- [Inactive Tab Message](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/inactive-tab-message/)
- [Favicon Cart Count](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/favicon-cart-count/)
- [Recently Viewed Products](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/recently-viewed-products/)
- [Volume Discounts](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/volume-discounts/)
- [Scroll to Top](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/scroll-to-top/)
- [Order Export](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/order-export/)
- [Video Tips](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/) - The video tips page is especially for the video which will give a detailed breakdown of our solutions. Have a look at it for a better understanding.
- [Custom Auto Numbering](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/custom-auto-numbering/)
- [Stock Management](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/stock-management/)
- [M2_MageMob App Builder](https://docs.appjetty.com/m2_magemob-appbuilder/)
- [SuiteCRM_Survey Rocket](https://docs.appjetty.com/suitecrm_survey-rocket/)
- [SugarCRM_Survey Rocket](https://docs.appjetty.com/sugarcrm_survey-rocket/)
- [Magento2 Geolocation Redirect](https://docs.appjetty.com/magento2-geolocation-redirect/)
- [Dynamics 365 - MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/dynamics-365-mappyfield-365/)
- [Delivery Date Scheduler](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/delivery-date-scheduler/)
- [Language Translator](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/language-translator/)
- [MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/mappyfield-365/) - Browse video tips page for detailed solution of Microsoft Dynamics MappyField 365 product. Take a look at it for better understanding.
- [Calendar 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/video-tips/calendar-365/) - Browse video tips page for detailed solution of Microsoft Dynamics Calendar 365 product. Take a look at it for better understanding.
- [Contact Us](https://docs.appjetty.com/contact/) - Have a query related to the printing industry, any feature of our tool, or need our assistance feel free to contact us. We will feel happy to help you out.
- [Dynamics Calendar 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/dynamics-calendar-365/)
- [M2_Australia Post Shipping](https://docs.appjetty.com/m2_australia-post-shipping/)
- [M2_Australia Post Parcel Send](https://docs.appjetty.com/m2_australia-post-parcel-send/)
- [M2_MageMob App Builder](https://docs.appjetty.com/m2_magemob-app-builder/)
- [M2 Language Translator](https://docs.appjetty.com/m2-language-translator/)
- [M2_Delivery Date Scheduler](https://docs.appjetty.com/m2_delivery-date-scheduler/)
- [Flare Theme Builder V1.0.0](https://docs.appjetty.com/flare-theme-builder-v1-0-0/)
- [Shopify-CommerceXpand](https://docs.appjetty.com/shopify-commercexpand/) - Shopify All-in-one apps

## Knowledge Base

- [General Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/general-configuration/) - In the setting page, you will see the “General Configuration”. Control user redirection based on geographical location and currency preferences. Options include showing popups, forcing redirection, or turning off geo redirection. Show Popup: Enable this feature to display a popup for redirection, allowing users to accept or decline. Force Redirection: Automatically redirect users from
- [Locations](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/locations/) - Through Locations, you can manage your locations for pickup and delivery. Also, you can set various configurations for Store Pickups and Local Deliveries for your customers from here. Location List In the Location List page you see a list of addresses with its Location Status, Location Name, Store Pickup, Local Delivery, Added by App and Action. You can
- [General Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/mail-notifications/) - You can view and update general configuration settings through this section. Global Step 1 : Display comment field - Toggle to Enable if you want to display a Comment box on the product page or cart page, so that customers can add some notes or instructions related to delivery or else you can Disable. Step 2 : Pre-select delivery date -
- [Local Delivery](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/local-delivery/) - In the first section - Local Delivery, you need to initially Enable it so proceed towards the further configurations. Then move forward to Enable Time Slot and toggle to Yes. The tags entered in the Local Delivery Order Tags field will be displayed in the Orders section for all local delivery orders. The Widget Styling section contains various icons to choose from for Local Delivery along with configuring Colors for Background, Icon, Hover
- [Store Pickup](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/store-pickup/) - First and foremost, you need to Enable the store pickup feature; by doing so, the further configurations would be listed. Now, Enable the Time Slot. If Map Option in Store Pickup is Enabled, a Map Key field will be displayed where you can enter the respective key. The tag(s) entered in the Store Pickup Order Tags field will be displayed for those orders where the customers have chosen ‘Store Pickup’ as
- [Shipping](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/shipping/) - In this section, you can configure the days and time slots available for shipping to meet your delivery needs. Initially, you need to Enable Shipping in order to configure the consequent fields. Manage Delivery Availability In this section, you need to first, select Time Zones and then accordingly select the days on which you want to enable shipping through Delivery Days.
- [General Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/general-settings-2/) - In General Settings you would be able to configure Add to Cart, Checkout Button, Delivery Estimated, Waiting List, Zipcode Reports and Location Detection. Disable Add to Cart Enabling this setting prevents checkout for inaccessible locations, while disabling it allows products to be added to the cart. When enabled globally, cart access is permitted by
- [Zipcode Widget](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/zipcode-widget/) - To configure the Zipcode appearance for the product page navigate to the Settings > Zipcode Validator. You can display the “Zipcode Validator” block in 4 different ways: - Inline Form - All product serviceability (popup) - Zipcode Validation Bar - Product wise serviceability (popup) Only one display type can be used at a time. For
- [Create and Assign Zipcode Rule](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/create-and-assign-zipcode-rule/) - Create Zip Code Rule Navigate to 'Settings > Create Zipcode Rule' in order to add a zip code rule. Listing The grid in this module consists of Zipcode Rule Name, Country, State, City, Priority, Rule Type, Rule Status and Action columns. Through the Action column, one can edit, delete and even export a particular
- [Does the App Work With Shopify's Native Multi-Currency?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/does-the-app-work-with-shopifys-native-multi-currency/) - No — the app is not compatible with Shopify's native multi-currency. Use the app's own currency converter instead of Shopify's native multi-currency, not both together, so the two don't conflict. If you want geo-based currency display, set it up through the app's Currency Converter (Geo-Location-based currency selection + the HTML currency-formatting codes pasted into Shopify's
- [Does the App Work if My Customers Use a VPN?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/does-the-app-work-if-my-customers-use-a-vpn/) - Yes. The app detects location and redirects correctly even when a customer is browsing through a VPN — a VPN doesn't break geo-detection. This also means a VPN is a handy way to test your country rules from a different location. No special configuration is needed for VPN traffic — location detection works as normal.
- [I Have Overlapping Redirection Rules - Which One Wins?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/i-have-overlapping-redirection-rules-which-one-wins/) - There's no priority or precedence system for rules. The app doesn't rank one rule above another, so the reliable approach is to set your rules up so they don't target the same visitor. You can add multiple entries by IP, Country, and State in Settings → Redirection Rule — each appears in its own list
- [Can I Speed Up the Redirect or Add a Delay?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-i-speed-up-the-redirect-or-add-a-delay/) - Short answer: there's no manual speed or delay setting to configure — and you don't need one. The app redirects automatically as soon as it detects the visitor's location on page load, so it's already firing at the earliest possible moment. There is no delay/timer field to adjust anywhere in the app. Redirection happens on
- [Seeing an Unexpected Redirect Popup? Check for Other Geolocation Apps](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/seeing-an-unexpected-redirect-popup-check-for-other-geolocation-apps/) - If a location or redirect popup is showing that you never set up, it may be coming from a different geolocation app installed on your store — not from GeoLocation + Currency Converter. Go to Shopify Admin → Apps and review your installed apps. Look for any other geolocation, redirect, or country-selector app besides GeoLocation
- [Does the App Cause 404 Errors? How Geo-Redirection Works](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/does-the-app-cause-404-errors-how-geo-redirection-works/) - Short answer: no, the app does not generate 404 errors. It only redirects traffic based on a visitor's geographic location. A 404 almost always means one of your redirection URLs points to a page that no longer exists. How the app works: it sends visitors to the store or URL you've mapped to their location
- [App or Widget Not Showing? Re-Enable It in the Theme Editor](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/app-or-widget-not-showing-re-enable-it-in-the-theme-editor/) - If the app suddenly stopped working or the widget disappeared, the most common cause is that the GeoLocation+Currency Converter app embed got toggled off in your Shopify theme editor. Re-enabling it usually fixes it. Go to Apps → AJ GeoLocation. On the settings page you'll see the Enable / Disable buttons — click Enable, which
- [Why Is My Store Auto-Redirecting With No Popup?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/why-is-my-store-auto-redirecting-with-no-popup/) - If visitors to one of your stores get sent to another store automatically — without ever seeing the choose-store popup — that store is set to Force Redirection. Switching it to Show Popup gives visitors the choice instead. Go to General Configuration and find the redirection mode. There are three options: Show Popup — displays
- [How Do I Redirect Visitors to a Subdirectory URL (e.g. buy.com/us)?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-do-i-redirect-visitors-to-a-subdirectory-url-e-g-buy-com-us/) - You can redirect visitors to a subdirectory of a site (like buy.com/us), not just to a top-level domain. Here's how to set it up. Add the base site (buy.com) in the app as your site. Go to Settings → Redirection Rule and click Add Redirection URL. In the popup, enter the full subdirectory URL you
- [How Do I Change the Currency Switcher Position?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-do-i-change-the-currency-switcher-position/) - Want to move the currency switcher — send it to a different corner, or lift the currency list from the top of the page down to the bottom, or drop it right into your header? You control all of this from one setting. Go to Currency Converter Setting → Position on Page. You have two
- [Why Isn't the Currency Converter Showing? Check Your Plan and App Status](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/why-isnt-the-currency-converter-showing-check-your-plan-and-app-status/) - The currency converter / currency dropdown won't appear on your storefront until two things are true: you're on the plan that includes it, and the app is actually installed and enabled. Here's how to get it live. Check your plan first — this is the most common cause. The currency converter is a paid feature
- [Why Does the Zipcode Widget Appear Twice on the Product Page?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/why-does-the-zipcode-widget-appear-twice-on-the-product-page/) - Seeing the zipcode widget show up twice on a product page? It's usually a double placement — the widget added both inline through the app and again manually in the theme, or the app block dropped into the template twice. (The app only runs one display type at a time, so a genuine duplicate always
- [How Do I Hide the 'Delivery Available' Message When the Zipcode Is Serviceable?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-do-i-hide-the-delivery-available-message-when-the-zipcode-is-serviceable/) - Some merchants only want the error message to show — displaying a "we deliver to your area" confirmation on a whitelisted location can feel redundant, especially on mobile. Here's the self-serve path. Go to Settings → Content Settings and find the Text Settings section. Clear the text in the Shipping Availability Message field (this is
- [I Entered Estimated Delivery Days But They Don't Show on the Storefront - Why?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/i-entered-estimated-delivery-days-but-they-dont-show-on-the-storefront-why/) - Set Estimated Delivery Days on your rule but nothing appears on the product page? The per-zipcode values won't display until the matching display toggle is switched on in General Settings. Go to Settings → General Settings and find the Delivery Estimated section. Enable Show Estimated Delivery Time. This is the toggle that actually renders the
- [Why Is a Zipcode Showing as Available on the Wrong Product?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/why-is-a-zipcode-showing-as-available-on-the-wrong-product/) - A zipcode shows as serviceable on a product where it shouldn't — even though it's not in that product's whitelist? Nine times out of ten, that zipcode lives in a rule that's assigned to all products, which makes it valid everywhere. Go to Settings → Assign Zipcode Rule → Show Assignment and review your assignments.
- [How Do I Show Different Delivery Messages for Different Zipcode Zones?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-do-i-show-different-delivery-messages-for-different-zipcode-zones/) - Want "delivers Mon/Wed/Fri" for one set of postcodes and a different message for another? Delivery details aren't set globally — they're set per rule, on the zipcodes inside it. So the trick is one rule per delivery zone. Create a separate rule for each delivery zone in Settings → Create Zipcode Rule (e.g. one rule
- [Add to Cart Still Allows Unserviceable Zipcodes - How Do I Enforce the Restriction?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/add-to-cart-still-allows-unserviceable-zipcodes-how-do-i-enforce-the-restriction/) - The zipcode check works, but customers can still add out-of-area products to the cart? That means the restriction isn't switched on yet, or the product doesn't have a rule assigned. Run through these three checks in order. Turn on the restriction. Go to Settings → General Settings and enable Add to Cart Restrictions. This is
- [How Do I Safely Test Zipcode Validator on a Duplicate/Draft Theme?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-do-i-safely-test-zipcode-validator-on-a-duplicate-draft-theme/) - Want to try the app before it touches your live store? Good news: the widget is enabled per theme, so you can set it up and preview it on a copy of your theme without any impact on live customers. In Shopify, go to Online Store → Themes, find your live theme, and choose Duplicate.
- [How Do I Fix CSV Upload Problems (Extra Spaces, Stray Text, or Garbled Special Characters)?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-do-i-fix-csv-upload-problems-extra-spaces-stray-text-or-garbled-special-characters/) - Uploaded a zipcode CSV but the codes won't validate on the storefront — or accented characters (å, ä, ö) turned into "?"? In almost every case the issue is in the CSV file itself, not the app. Here's how to clean it up. Check for extra spaces. Open your CSV and make sure the zipcode
- [Why Did an Order Come Through With a Past/Invalid Delivery Date?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/why-did-an-order-come-through-with-a-past-invalid-delivery-date/) - Occasionally an order lands with a delivery date that's already in the past. The usual cause is a stale cart, and the intended behavior is meant to prevent it — here's what's going on. Why it happens: The customer selected a valid date earlier, left without completing the purchase, and finished the order later (an
- [Why Does a Product Show 'Sold Out' When It's Actually in Stock?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/why-does-a-product-show-sold-out-when-its-actually-in-stock/) - A product showing "Sold Out" that's actually in stock is usually not an inventory problem — it's an order limit doing its job for a particular day or slot. What's happening: When a day or time slot hits its Order Limit, the app stops accepting further orders for that day/slot. To a customer that can
- [Store Pickup and Shipping Show Different Dates - How Do I Align Them?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/store-pickup-and-shipping-show-different-dates-how-do-i-align-them/) - If Store Pickup offers different dates than Shipping, nothing's broken — the two run on separate configurations. Aligning them makes them match. Why they differ: Store Pickup has its own Delivery Days, Time Slots, Cut-off Time, and Preparation/Processing settings, set independently from your Shipping config. Different settings simply produce different dates. To make Store Pickup
- [Why Don't Delivery Details Appear in My Merchant Order-Confirmation Email?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/why-dont-delivery-details-appear-in-my-merchant-order-confirmation-email/) - Seeing the delivery date, time, and comment in the customer's email but not in your order-confirmation email? That's expected by default — and easy to change. Why: By default, the app writes the delivery details into the customer notification, not the merchant email. So if you're checking your own merchant confirmation, the fields won't be
- [How Is the Earliest Available Delivery Date Calculated?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-is-the-earliest-available-delivery-date-calculated/) - "Why can't customers pick tomorrow?" The earliest selectable date isn't arbitrary — it's the result of your own settings stacked together. Here's the formula and some real examples. Earliest date = your enabled Delivery Days − Blackout dates + Preparation/Processing days, then rolled past the Cut-off time. Where these live: Delivery Days: Shipping → Manage
- [What Does the 'Pre-Select Delivery Date' Option Do?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-does-the-pre-select-delivery-date-option-do/) - Turning this on is handy, but it changes checkout behavior in a way worth knowing before you flip it. What it does: Set General Settings → Global → Pre-select Delivery Date to Enabled and the widget auto-selects the first available date and shows the time slots immediately — the customer doesn't have to open the
- [How Do I Style the Widget With Custom CSS?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-do-i-style-the-widget-with-custom-css/) - Want the label bold, bigger, red, or uppercase — or a smaller comment box or repositioned calendar icon? Built-in options come first; anything finer is a quick line of CSS. Start with the built-in Styles. The Styles tab controls colors and text — label color, button colors, error-message color, calendar colors, and the widget's text
- [Widget Not Showing on the Storefront? Re-Enable the App](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/widget-not-showing-on-the-storefront-re-enable-the-app/) - If the date picker suddenly vanished from your store, it's usually not broken — it's switched off or lost its theme integration. Two quick checks fix the large majority of these. Make sure the app is enabled. Go to Settings and confirm the Enable/Disable (Application Status) button is set to enabled. Reload your storefront after
- [Why Isn't My Cut-Off Time Working? Troubleshooting Checklist](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/why-isnt-my-cut-off-time-working-troubleshooting-checklist/) - If your cut-off time lets customers still book the same-day after the deadline, it's almost always one of three things. Run this checklist in order. Turn on product-level configuration. A per-product cut-off is ignored if the product isn't enabled for its own settings. Go to Shipping & Delivery → Product Based Set-up, find the product,
- [Why Do Some Orders Arrive With No Delivery Date? (Stopping the Express-Checkout Bypass)](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/why-do-some-orders-arrive-with-no-delivery-date-stopping-the-express-checkout-bypass/) - Getting orders with a blank delivery date even though you made it required? In almost every case we've traced, the customer never passed through the widget — they used an express/dynamic checkout button. Here's how to close that gap. First, confirm the date is actually required: Go to General Settings → Set up Delivery Dates.
- [Store View (Frontend View)](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/store-view-frontend-view/) - For redirection, customers will get the popup with the selection of country & its state to visit the language specific domain. Your customers will also get the Currency switcher option if you have enabled the same from the Currency Switcher settings. Note: It is compatible with the native Shopify multi-currency support.
- [Redirection Rules](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/redirection-rules/) - To configure the redirection rule you will navigate to the Settings > Redirection Rule. It is based on various criteria such as location, preferences, or campaign-specific parameters. By clicking the redirection rule here on the page, you will see the default store language and the "Add Redirection URL" button. By clicking on the "Add Redirection URL" button you can configure
- [Redirect Popup](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/redirect-popup/) - You can customize the popup appearance for URL redirection by inserting the relevant content with custom CSS. Here you will find options such as template selection to display the popup with logo and the message to redirect in the specific URL. As per the Popup settings, you can also preview the Popup. Navigating to Settings
- [Installation Steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/installation-steps-2/) - Login to Shopify as Admin. Search the GeoLocation + Currency Converter in the shopify market place. After selecting it, you can view the ‘Install’ button, click on it. As you click on the ‘Install’ button, you will be redirected to the “Install app” screen. Here you can view the access data information and “Install” button. ● After
- [Currency Converter Setting](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/currency-converter-setting/) - You can customize the Display and Color settings for the “Currency Converter” widget. Display Configure the Currency Converter widget for how you want to display it in the store. The following setting options are provided: Display on Desktop and/or Mobile: You can enable and display the widget on Desktop and/or Mobile. Desktop – Click on the
- [Currency Converter](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/currency-converter/) - You need to configure the settings related to currencies. You can also enable the Currency selection as per the Geo Location of the visitors. Currency Formatting Setup You must configure the Currency Formatting and need to be verified. You need to copy the HTML codes for “HTML with currency” and “HTML Without currency” and paste
- [Contact Us](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/contact-us/) - We simplify your business, offer unique business solution in digital web and IT landscapes. Customization: If you would like to customize or discuss about additional feature for GeoIP Redirect, please write to sales@appjetty.com
- [Block Request](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/block-request/) - You can block the unwanted users or traffic to your website by entering the IP address(es) manually or selecting the country and State from the List. Ip’s Enter IP address(es) which you want to block and then click on Save button. The IP address(es) will be added under the “Blocked IP Addresses”. From the Select Country drop down
- [Product Based Set-up](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/product-based-set-up/) - Let’s now proceed to configuring the delivery date and time for shipping based on different products. Firstly, you must set the Date Picker on the Product Page through Setting > General Settings > Global > Select Page for Date Picker > Product Page. If you have selected the Product Page only then you can set all configurations in
- [Zones](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/zones/) - Create Zones Zones are designed specifically for local delivery. You can create multiple zones by simply adding the corresponding zip codes. You can add multiple zones for Local Delivery for your customers. Navigate to Create Zone, you can create the zones from here. Zone Details You can set the name of the Zone Name. You can
- [Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/dashboard-3/) - As you open the Calendar 365 application, you can see an Activities option in the Resource Calendar. There are multiple entities available under the Activities option.
- [Plan](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/plan/) - In this section, you can check your current plan as well as you can choose a new plan. To integrate the AJ Delivery Dates & Shipping app in your store, you can purchase the Monthly or Yearly plan. Each plan’s features and prices are mentioned. You will get a discount on the yearly plan. There
- [Add Ons](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/add-ons-2/) - To purchase any additional functionality navigate to Add Ons. There are two add-on features - Order Pickup Email Notification and Reschedule Delivery. Here you can see the functionality description and you can also purchase new functionality as well as remove them. By clicking on the Demo Pictures Button, you will be able to view the pictures of that
- [Enable/Disable Application](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/enable-disable-application/) - In order to Enable/Disable the application, simply navigate to Settings and click on the Enable/Disable button.
- [Order Listing](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/order-listing/) - In the Order Listing grid, it contains the following columns: Order ID, Items, Delivery Date, Delivery Slot, Comment, Order Placed On, No Contact Delivery, Fulfillment Status, Delivery Type, Delivery Status, Browser, Device and Order Source.
- [Packaging Slip](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/packaging-slip/) - If you want to print the delivery date and time on the printing slip while delivering the order, then integrate the Printing Slip feature to your Shopify store. Note: Order Printer app should be installed in your store. Navigate to the Settings ➤ Packaging Slip,
- [App Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/app-configuration/) - After the installation of the AJ Delivery Date & Shipping app, you need to integrate the app once. However, you need to Integrate the Product Page or Cart Page of AJ Delivery Date & Shipping with the Theme for displaying the app widget. Product Page Self Installation Now, if you have placed the delivery date
- [Order Id, Items, Delivery Date and Delivery Slot](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/order-id-items-delivery-date-and-delivery-slot-2/) - Order ID In this column, the IDs of all the orders will be listed. Items A total number of items in the order will be displayed; when clicked upon, a pop-up displaying the details of the specific order will appear. Delivery Date The date on which the customer will receive the order. Delivery
- [Fulfillment Status, Delivery Type and Delivery Status](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/order-id-items-delivery-date-and-delivery-slot/) - Fulfillment Status In this column, whether the order has been fulfilled or not will be shown. Delivery Type The selected type of delivery, i.e. Store Pickup, Local Delivery, Shipping will be displayed here. Delivery Status The delivery status will be mentioned according to the order’s progress. You can change the status through the dropdown.
- [Mail Notifications](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/mail-notifications-2/) - If you need to include delivery date and time to the mail notification, navigate to Settings -> Mail Notification If you are selecting the Cart option for displaying the delivery selection then navigate towards the Cart Page. Similarly, for the Product Page.
- [Export Orders](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/export-orders/) - In order to export the orders, click on the Export button. A CSV file will be exported to your local drive containing all the listed orders. Once you open the exported file, you will see all the orders along with their required details.
- [Export Order Items](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/export-order-items/) - Export Order Items
- [Comment, Order Placed On and No Contact Delivery](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/comment-order-placed-on-and-no-contact-delivery/) - Comment, Order Placed On and No Contact Delivery
- [Browser, Device and Order Source](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/browser-device-and-order-source/) - Browser Here, the browser from which the order has been placed will be shown. Device This column displays the device used for ordering. Order Source The source through which the order has been placed will be listed here.
- [Widget](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/widget/) - You can manage the widget styling in this section, where you can configure both the style and text settings for Local Delivery and Store Pickup. You can also manage the appearance of date and time widgets through Styles.
- [Styles](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/styles/) - Styles allow you to customize the texts of the calendar days and months along with heading, placeholder, label and error messages. Additionally, you can modify the label color, error message text color, button background color, disabled text color, and more. The initial section - Calendar Day Text Settings provides fields where you can specify how you want the
- [Apply Filters](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/apply-filters/) - The Order Items can be filtered by navigating towards the Add Filters button. These products can be filtered as per the Delivery Date.
- [Order Item Listing](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/order-item-listing/) - The grid in the Order Item Listing section would contain all the items that have been ordered. The Delivery Date, Products, Quantity and SKU will be listed of the respective items.
- [Missing Orders](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/missing-orders/) - This page displays orders that have been placed with no specific mention of the date.
- [FAQ's](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/faqs/) - In FAQ's most common queries are answered. Also, there are mail and contact numbers mentioned as well to contact the team if any query arises. The links to many articles are given through this, you will be able to understand the steps regarding certain processes.
- [Can we have local delivery , store pickup on the product page](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-we-have-local-delivery-store-pickup-on-the-product-page/) - We can have Local Delivery and Store Pickup on the cart page but not on the product page.
- [Dashboard Filters](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/dashboard-filters/) - You can filter the orders by navigating to the “Filter” section where such actions can be performed: Today, Yesterday, Last 7 Days, Last 30 Days, This Month, Last Month, Custom. As per the selected filter you will be able to view the data accordingly once you click on Apply. In the Custom filter, you need to select the dates
- [Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/dashboard-2/) - Shipping Orders Shipping is the process of packing an order at the warehouse and sending it to the customer or a distribution center near them. From the dashboard, you can see how many orders are Pending, how many orders are Out for Delivery and how many of them are Delivered. Store Pickup Store
- [Book A Meeting](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/book-a-meeting-2/) - By clicking on this button, you will be redirected to the AppJetty calendar. From there you can book a meeting on your own or you can contact the team to book a meeting for you. When you click on a particular date, various time sections appear. The Next button is displayed when you click on your
- [Application Interface Overview](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/application-interface-overview/) - After configuring the Settings, Shipping Configuration, Restrictions and Styles, your customers will get the delivery date block and the date selection from the calendar view on the Product page or on the Cart page. Product Page If you have enabled the ‘Delivery date selection’ for the Product page, the customers will get
- [Manage Visibility](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/manage-visibility/) - You can manage widget visibility to ensure customers only see products that are available in stock. Now, to set an availability navigate to the Settings > Manage Visibility . Enable the “Manage Visibility Product-wise” field to manage product wise widget visibility. You can filter the list by collections as well as product tags. Moving
- [PopUp Floating Icons](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/popup-floating-icons/) - To configure the popup floating icon, go to Settings > Popup Floating Icons Setting. Note that the popup floating icon setting is available for all product serviceability (popup) only. The following options can be customized: Choose Icon Select the floating icon that you want to display on the frontend. Color Settings Select the floating icon's
- [Zipcode Logs](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/zipcode-logs/) - This module records all ZIP codes entered by customers while searching for products in the front store. To access it, go to Settings → Zipcode Logs. The grid includes the following columns: - Zipcode: Displays the searched ZIP code. - Is Serviceable: Indicates whether the product was available in that area. - State: Shows
- [Waiting List](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/waiting-list/) - Customers who have submitted their information in the front store for the waiting list will have their details listed in the Waiting List module. Navigate towards Settings > Waiting List. The grid in the 'Waiting List' section displays the following details: - Contact Info: Customer's contact information. - Zipcode: The location where the customer checked
- [Content Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/content-settings/) - You can customize the text and color settings for displaying messages by navigating to “Settings > Content Settings.” Popup Image Here you can choose or upload your check-in availability icon. Choose Delivery Information Layout Here you can choose the layout through which you can showcase the delivery information among the following:- - Inline
- [Prerequisites](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/prerequisites-4/) - Shopify Admin Login. Shopify eCommerce Store’s link.
- [Introduction](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/introduction-4/) - With AppJetty Zipcode Validator, Shopify merchants can verify product shipping by allowing customers to enter their zip code on their store. Merchants can manage shipping availability by whitelisting or blacklisting zip codes from the backend, restricting order placements accordingly. Furthermore, you can restrict the 'Add to Cart' and 'Checkout' functionality for zip codes where delivery
- [Installation Steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/installation-steps-4/) - Installation Steps Login to Shopify as Admin. Search the Advanced Zipcode Validator in the Shopify market place. After selecting it, you can view the ‘Install’ button, click on it. As you click on the ‘Install’ button, you will be redirected to the “Install app” screen. Here you can view the access data information and “Install”
- [Front Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/front-store-view/) - After configuring the Zipcode Settings, customers can check product availability on the product page using inline form or pop-up. This helps them verify if the product can be delivered to their area before placing an order. On the product details page, customers will find a ZIP code field where they can enter their location
- [What is cut-off time?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-is-cut-off-time/) - The cutoff time is the closing time you can place an order for it to be delivered the same day. For example, if the cutoff time is 4:00 PM, orders placed before 4:00 PM will be delivered the same day. Orders placed after 4:00 PM will be delivered the next day.
- [Is there a way to block/disable certain days for delivery?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/is-there-a-way-to-block-disable-certain-days-for-delivery/) - Yes, in the backend through “Shipping” settings, you can block/disable specific dates such as holidays or weekends, so customers cannot select those days for delivery.
- [How to add processing days in store pickup and local delivery](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-add-processing-days-in-store-pickup-and-local-delivery/) - You can set processing days for store pickup and local delivery by navigating to "Shipping & Delivery > Locations" when adding or editing a location.
- [How to add add order confirmation date in email](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-add-add-order-confirmation-date-in-email/) - You can add order confirmation date, along with managing the time of the email and the notifications, through "Settings > Mail Notifications."
- [How does the Order Delivery Date Picker improve my delivery planning?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-does-the-order-delivery-date-picker-improve-my-delivery-planning/) - By allowing customers to choose their delivery date, you can better forecast your delivery needs and allocate resources more effectively, reducing last-minute rushes and improving overall efficiency.
- [How can I give option for rescheduling the delivery](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-give-option-for-rescheduling-the-delivery/) - Reschedule Delivery' is an add-on feature. Once you purchase it, you can configure reschedule for Shipping through "Shipping & Delivery > Shipping" and for Local Delivery and Store Pickup you can navigate towards "Widget > Local Delivery" and "Widget > Store Pickup" respectively.
- [Add-Ons](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/add-ons/) - For additional functionality navigate to Add Ons. There are two add on features - Order pickup email notification and reschedule delivery. Here you can see the functionality description and you can also purchase new functionality as well as remove them. By clicking on the Demo Pictures Button, you will be able to view the pictures of that particular
- [Does the app support multiple language](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/does-the-app-support-multiple-language/) - Currently, our app supports only the English language.
- [Does AJ Delivery Date & Shipping have the capability to show only when certain products are in the cart](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/does-aj-delivery-date-shipping-have-the-capability-to-show-only-when-certain-products-are-in-the-cart/) - Currently, we do not support displaying only certain products in the cart. However, you can show or hide products directly on the product page.
- [Do we have free plan available with the app](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/do-we-have-free-plan-available-with-the-app/) - Yes, "Free" plan is available for shopify development and partner stores.
- [Can we have widget on checkout page](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-we-have-widget-on-checkout-page/) - Widgets cannot be added to the checkout page; however, they can be configured on the cart page.
- [Can we have widget on both product page and cart page](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-we-have-widget-on-both-product-page-and-cart-page/) - Widgets can only be added to the cart page. If "Product Page" is selected, attempting to access the "Widget > Local Delivery" and "Widget > Store Pickup" sections will display a note indicating that the "Cart Page" must be selected to proceed with the configurations.
- [If we want to display a widget on a certain product how can we do that?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/if-we-want-to-display-a-widget-on-a-certain-product-how-can-we-do-that/) - In the "Manage Visibility" section, you can choose to show or hide the widget for each product individually.
- [If we want to change the location icon can we do that ?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/if-we-want-to-change-the-location-icon-can-we-do-that/) - Yes, in the “Content Settings” section, you have the ability to change the location icon to suit your preferences
- [How can I show the estimated delivery date ?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-show-the-estimated-delivery-date/) - Navigate to “General Settings” and find the “Delivery Estimated” section. Here, you can configure whether to display the delivery time or the Estimated date the product will be delivered.
- [Difference between add to cart restriction and global add to cart restriction?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/difference-between-add-to-cart-restriction-and-global-add-to-cart-restriction/) - Add to Cart Restriction prevents adding products to the cart if delivery is unavailable for the entered Zipcode. Global Add to Cart Restriction allows products to be added to the cart when no specific delivery rules are assigned.
- [Can we restrict client to add the product to the cart if zipcode does not match ?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-we-restrict-client-to-add-the-product-to-the-cart-if-zipcode-does-not-match/) - Yes, you can enable add-to-cart restrictions based on zip code matching in the General Settings.
- [Can we have widget on both product page and header?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-we-have-widget-on-both-product-page-and-header/) - The Zipcode Widget can be configured to display either on the product page or in the header, ensuring you can choose the most effective placement for your store's layout. You can easily manage these settings in the Zipcode Widget sections to fit your specific needs.
- [Can I customize the look and feel of the date-picker?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-i-customize-the-look-and-feel-of-the-date-picker/) - You will be able to customize the appearance of the date-picker to match your store's design and branding. Through the Styles section you can achieve it.
- [Are there any limitations on the number of orders that can be scheduled per day?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/are-there-any-limitations-on-the-number-of-orders-that-can-be-scheduled-per-day/) - You can set a maximum number of deliveries per day through the “Shipping” section to ensure you do not overbook your delivery capacity.
- [Shipping Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/shipping-settings/) - Under this menu, you can configure your working and non-working days along with the Time slots. Define your preparation time, maximum delivery days & other configurations which are used to set shipping configurations. The Shipping section is in the Settings page. Configure Shipping Settings Shipping configuration : If you click on the “Enable”
- [Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/settings/) - All the main configurations and setups can be managed in Settings. To set up Application Status A button to enable the display of the application is provided. If you have kept it disabled your application configurations will not be displayed in the front shopify store.
- [Prerequisites](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/prerequisites-3/) - Shopify Admin Login. Shopify eCommerce Store’s link.
- [Plans](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/plans/) - In this section, you can check your current plan as well as you can choose a new plan. To integrate the Delivery Dates & Shipping Rates app in your store, you can purchase the Monthly or Yearly plan. Each plan’s features and prices are mentioned. You will get a discount on the yearly
- [Manage Zones](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/manage-zones/) - Zip Code configuration to set up the zones for your Local store. You can create a zone for shipping profiles from here : Create Zones You can add multiple zones for Local Delivery for your customers. Navigate to Create Zone, you can create the zones from here. Zone Details You can set
- [Manage Styles](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/manage-styles/) - In the ‘Style’, you can configure the ‘Calendar Day Text Settings’, ‘Calendar Month Text Settings’, ‘Text Settings’ and ‘Color Settings’ for the Delivery Date to display on the Store view (Frontend View). To navigate to Style, go to Settings -> Style. You will get the delivery date block display on the Product page or Cart page whichever
- [Manage Store Pickup](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/manage-store-pickup/) - Firstly, You must enable delivery date selection to the Cart Page from the settings. Settings → Global Settings → Select page for date picker → Cart Page After that click on the Save button. To manage settings for Store Pickup you have to click on Store Pickup present in the Settings, below Locations. From here, you
- [Manage Shipping Profile](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/manage-shipping-profile/) - To go to the Shipping profile you have to navigate to Shipping Rates in Settings. Configure Shipping Settings You can configure the shipping setting like To Enable, Disable or Test Mode for created shipping rates. Setting up shipping rates visibility You have to perform the given steps to apply shipping rates you have added
- [Prerequisites](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/prerequisites-2/) - Shopify Admin Login. Shopify eCommerce Store’s link.
- [Manage Product Based Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/manage-product-based-configurations/) - You can set all those configurations for each product from the Product Base tab. Firstly, You must enable the Product Page from the Setting > General Settings > Select Page for Date Picker > Product Page. If you have selected the product page then only you can set all configurations for the product base. Now, you can
- [Installation Steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/installation-steps-3/) - Follow these steps for installation: Login to Shopify as Admin. Search the AppJetty Delivery Date & Shipping and select it. After selecting it, you will find the Add App button, click on Add App button. As you click on the Add App button, ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. Now install the app by clicking
- [Manage Location](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/manage-location/) - Through the Location section, you can manage your locations for shipping. Also, you can set various configurations for Store Pickups and Local Deliveries for your customers from here. Set up Location List In the Location List page you see a list of addresses with its Location Name, Store Pickup, Local Delivery and Added by App status.
- [Manage Local Delivery](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/manage-local-delivery/) - Firstly, You must enable delivery date selection to the Cart Page from the settings. Settings → Global Settings → Select page for date picker → Cart Page After that click on the Save button. To manage local delivery settings click on the Local Delivery present in the Settings section. From here, you can manage the Local Delivery
- [Installation Steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/installation-steps/) - Login to Shopify as Admin. Search the AppJetty Deliver Date & Shipping in the shopify market place. After selecting it, you can view the ‘Install’ button, click on it. As you click on the ‘Install’ button, you will be redirected to the “Install app” screen. Here you can view the access data information and “Install” button. ●
- [Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/dashboard/) - Shipping Orders Shipping is the process of packing an order at the warehouse and sending it to the customer or a distribution center near them. From here you can see how many orders are pending, how many orders are out for Delivery and how many of them are delivered. Store Pickup
- [Prerequisites](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/prerequisites/) - Shopify Admin Login. Shopify eCommerce Store’s link.
- [Manage Integration](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/manage-integration/) - After the installation of the Deliver Date & Shipping Rates app, you need to integrate the app once. Navigate to Configurations ➤ App configurations. Here, you need to Integrate the Product Page & Cart Page of Delivery Date & Shipping Rates with the Theme for displaying the app widget. This is how you can perform App Integration
- [Introduction](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/introduction-3/) - As you open the Calendar 365 application, you can see an Activities option in the Resource Calendar. There are multiple entities available under the Activities option.
- [Introduction](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/introduction-2/) - AppJetty Deliver Date & Shipping Rates provides Shopify merchants to enable a delivery date option on the cart page. It allows customers to specify a delivery date for their orders. Now manage your deliveries and streamline your delivery operations with our AppJetty Deliver Date & Shipping Rates.
- [Introduction](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/introduction/) - AppJetty Delivery Date & Shipping empowers Shopify merchants to offer a delivery date selection option on either the cart page or the product page. This feature allows customers to specify their preferred delivery date for their orders. Simplify your delivery process and enhance operational efficiency with AppJetty Delivery Date & Shipping.
- [General Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/general-settings/) - Under Application Status you will find the general settings tab. Click on it to update or configure new settings. To configure general settings for application follow the below steps. Configure Global Settings Step 1 : Display comment field - There is a “Yes or No” option to select from. Select the “Yes”
- [Book a Meeting](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/book-a-meeting/) - By clicking on this button, you will be redirected to the AppJetty calendar. From there you can book a meeting on your own or you can contact the team to book a meeting for you. When you click on a particular date, various time sections appear. Next button is displayed when you click on your
- [Benefits of AppJetty Delivery Date & Shipping](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/benefits-of-appjetty-delivery-date-shipping/) - Pre-Selected Delivery Date Automatically selects the next available delivery date in the calendar during checkout, simplifying the delivery date selection process for customers. Delivery Option Configuration Enable or disable delivery days and define time slots for each day, configurable on the Cart page or Product page. Set Cutoff Time Specify the time after
- [How our app works in Frontend Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-our-app-works-in-frontend-store-view/) - After configuring the Settings, Shipping Configuration, Restrictions and Styles, your customers will get the delivery date block and the date selection from the calendar view on the Product page or on the Cart page. Product Page If you have enabled the ‘Delivery date selection’ for the Product page, the customers will get the
- [AppJetty GeoLocation + Currency Converter](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/appjetty-geolocation-currency-converter/) - Easy to integrate and install (No coding skills required) Customizable popup for redirection Display the popup for displaying country specific websites which are available in the user’s location. Customize the popup: Background Color, Font Color and Button customizations. Enable Currency Converter Integrate the Currency Converter for your website using Geo Location + Currency Converter. Block
- [AppJetty Geo Location/Redirect](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/appjetty-geo-location-redirect/) - Apps Navigate to the apps and select “ AJ GeoLocation”. On the settings page, you will see the Enable and Disable GeoLocation+Currency Converter buttons. To enable or disable the GeoLocation+Currency Converter, you will be redirected to the CMS settings where you can Enable or Disable the app. In the theme editor, activate the “GeoLocation+Currency Converter” by clicking
- [Delivery Orders](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/delivery-orders/) - Order Listing You will get a list of the order details such as Order ID, Items (when clicked on, details of the product will be displayed), Delivery Date, Delivery Slot, Comment, Date (on which the order was placed on), No contact delivery, Fulfillment Status, Delivery Type and Action. From the Order listing, you
- [Calendar View](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/calendar-view/) - ‘Calendar View’ provides a monthly view of the orders received per day. The today icon on the right shows the orders of the present day.
- [Assign Delivery Date & Time Manually to Any Order from shopify admin](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/assign-delivery-date-time-manually-to-any-order-from-shopify-admin/) - Edit Customer’s Order If the delivery date picker (calendar) is set on the cart page, you (or Shopify Admin) can edit and change the selected delivery date of the customers if there are any changes in the delivery schedule. For that navigate to Orders menu and click on that specific order for which you want
- [I have a Business Paid Google Account With no Limitation How can I Renew Daily Quota Once Character Limit Over?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/i-have-a-business-paid-google-account-with-no-limitation-how-can-i-renew-daily-quota-once-character-limit-over/) - If you have a paid Google account with no limitation, you can renew the daily quota once the character limit is over. Here is how you set or know the daily limit.
- [How to enable the app and set the basic configuration?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-enable-the-app-and-set-the-basic-configuration/) - The video explains how you can enable the Delivery Dates and Shipping Rates app on your Shopify store. Along with that, learn how to set basic configurations like pre-select delivery date, date format, enable time-slot, dynamic checkout button, and more. If you have a customized theme, you can enable that as well. Configure whether you
- [How to configure local delivery?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-configure-local-delivery/) - Here is a quick guide on how to configure the local delivery shipping option for your Shopify store. Learn how to enable local delivery option, configure order tag, icon, icon style, zip code, and texts like heading, error message & additional note. If you want your customers to reschedule the delivery date or time, you
- [How to configure store pickup?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-configure-store-pickup/) - This video shows how to configure the store pickup shipping option for your Shopify store. You will learn how to enable the store pickup option, configure order tags, icons, icon styles, and texts like heading, location heading, & additional notes. If you want your customers to reschedule store pickup, you can configure reschedule delivery option
- [How to create locations for store pickups & local delivery?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-create-locations-for-store-pickups-local-delivery/) - In this video, you will learn how to add multiple locations for store pickup and local delivery shipping options. The location details will include everything from store name to zip code to display at your store. Once you add locations, you can configure it for store pickup and local delivery shipping methods. You can add
- [How to set product-wise configurations for shipping?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-set-product-wise-configurations-for-shipping/) - Learn how to configure different shipping configurations for different products in this detailed video. After watching this video, you will be able to set different shipping configurations for individual products, like processing days, blackout days, and many other things. This configuration is helpful when you sell products that require different preparation times. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4umnng_wifM
- [How to set available delivery days, time slots, and holidays for shipping?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-set-available-delivery-days-time-slots-and-holidays-for-shipping/) - In this video, learn how to specify your working and non-working days based on store time zone, manage time slots, set up processing days to prepare the order, and much more. To ensure this app blends with your store style, manage style and textual configurations for features. Last but not the least, learn how to
- [What if all the Credit Edits of the Plan are Used?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-if-all-the-credit-edits-of-the-plan-are-used/) - Credit edit means the bulk operations you can perform with the help of a product editor. We offer 20 credit edits for free. If you want additional credit edits, you can get it for some additional charges.
- [What if all the Credit Images of the Plan are Used?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-if-all-the-credit-images-of-the-plan-are-used/) - Credit Images means how many images you can optimize. We offer 100 credit images for free. If you want some more credit images, you can get it for some additional charges.
- [Can I Cancel My Subscription at any Time?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-i-cancel-my-subscription-at-any-time/) - Yes, you can cancel the subscription at any time. You just need to uninstall the app, the subscription will be canceled any time.
- [Would You Help With the Configuration Part if it Turns out to be Troublesome?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/would-you-help-with-the-configuration-part-if-it-turns-out-to-be-troublesome/) - While configuring the CommerceXpand, if any configuration troubles you, you can surely connect to us. We will be happy to assist you.
- [Which Themes are Supported?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/which-themes-are-supported/) - Being the Shopify store owner, you might have a different theme. Our apps will work smoothly with all the Shopify themes.
- [Can you Customize the App as our Store Needs?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-you-customize-the-app-as-our-store-needs/) - Yes, you can get the store customized as per your business needs. Just share with us your requirements and that’s it. Our expert developers will carve the store for you.
- [Do you have a Refund Policy?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/do-you-have-a-refund-policy/) - Yes, we have a refund policy. As a well-known brand, we aim to make this process smoother and provide upto 30 days of the money-back guarantee for the majority of our products.
- [Do You Provide Installation Service?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/do-you-provide-installation-service/) - Yes, we do provide installation service for the CommerceXpand that too free of cost. You don’t have to pay any extra penny for the installation apart from the extension charge.
- [Is it Mandatory to Use All the Apps?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/is-it-mandatory-to-use-all-the-apps/) - CommerceXpand comes with the best bundle of apps to level up your efficiency. Sometimes you don’t certain apps to function.
- [Why Use CommerceXpand?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/why-use-commercexpand/) - CommerceXpand comes with a bundle of apps that can integrate with your store to reduce your effort and cost. It is the one-stop solution, with which you can quickly streamline your process.
- [CommerceXpand Festive App for Shopify](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/commercexpand-festive-app-for-shopify/) - This video walks you through our Festive App and showcases how Shopify store owners can decorate their store with festival specific stickers. To know more about please review: https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand For any queries get back to us at support@appjetty.com https://www.youtube.com/embed/sga7FazDUDM
- [CommerceXpand Facebook Messenger Chat App Tutorial for Shopify](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/commercexpand-facebook-messenger-chat-app-tutorial-for-shopify/) - CommerceXpand is a Shopify product bundle that brings together 25+ apps to enhance customer experience. Learn how you can help your customers with support and answer their queries while they're live on your site with CommerceXpand Facebook Messenger Chat app. To learn more visit us at AppJetty: https://www.appjetty.com/shopify-comm... For any queries get back to us
- [How to Hide Shopify Best Selling Products - commercexpand](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-hide-shopify-best-selling-products-commercexpand/) - CommerceXpand's Best Seller Protection App helps you hide your store's best selling products from your competitors and other malicious people. In this video, you'll learn how to do that. To learn more visit us at AppJetty: https://www.appjetty.com/shopify-comm... For any queries get back to us at support@appjetty.com https://www.youtube.com/embed/bb8VBp69yDc
- [Create Redirection Rules Based On Country and State in your Shopify Store](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/create-redirection-rules-based-on-country-and-state-in-your-shopify-store/) - Try CommerceXpand for FREE & Paid Apps → https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand Know how to set up store redirection based on location. Add redirection rules for state and country with CommerceXpand Geolocation Redirect extension - a Shopify app to increase sales. To learn more visit us at AppJetty: https://www.appjetty.com/shopify-comm... For any queries get back to us at support@appjetty.com
- [Configure Product Review Shopify Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/configure-product-review-shopify-settings/) - Boost your online stores' sales by automating the publishing. Learn how to configure the settings and UI and appearance of product reviews app. To learn more visit us at AppJetty: https://www.appjetty.com/shopify-comm... For any queries get back to us at support@appjetty.com https://www.youtube.com/embed/i_nZ8MNOebE
- [Announcement Bar Shopify: Configuration Steps - CommerceXpand](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/announcement-bar-shopify-configuration-steps-commercexpand/) - Announcement Bar Shopify: Configuration Steps "With announcement bar, you can display announcements and promotions on your online store". This video covers the configuration of text bar and shipping bar. Let's get started with it. To know more about please review: https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand For any queries get back to us at support@appjetty.com https://www.youtube.com/embed/cehSU_3p0AI
- [How to Hide Products from Shopify StoreFront Search - CommerceXpand](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-hide-products-from-shopify-storefront-search-commercexpand/) - CommerceXpand is many-apps-in-one package for Shopify. This video explains how you can hide products on search engine and in storefront search with CommerceXpands Hide SEO app. For any queries get back to us at support@appjetty.com https://www.youtube.com/embed/EG-nxU70nqA
- [Set Up Multi Currency Converter App for Shopify](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/set-up-multi-currency-converter-app-for-shopify/) - Providing multiple-currency option to your customers is easy with a currency converter app. Here's how to configure it. To learn more visit us at AppJetty: https://www.appjetty.com/shopify-comm... For any queries get back to us at support@appjetty.com https://www.youtube.com/embed/utrec1Ss5sE
- [Get started with SEO and Image Optimizer - The Best Shopify SEO App](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/get-started-with-seo-and-image-optimizer-the-best-shopify-seo-app/) - Try CommerceXpand for FREE & Paid Apps → https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand CommerceXpand: Learn how to improve SEO in Shopify stores by optimizing images and adding alt tags with our Image and SEO Optimizer Shopify Apps. To learn more visit us at AppJetty: https://www.appjetty.com/shopify-comm... For any queries get back to us at support@appjetty.com https://www.youtube.com/embed/met8BEZU2CU
- [CommerceXpand - Best Shopify SEO App - Image Restoration Guide](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/commercexpand-best-shopify-seo-app-image-restoration-guide/) - Try CommerceXpand for FREE & Paid Apps → https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand Made a mistake in optimizing images? Don’t worry! With these 4 steps, you can restore your product and blog images to their original size and format, and learn how to improve SEO in Shopify. To learn more visit us at AppJetty: https://www.appjetty.com/shopify-comm... For any queries get
- [How to Set Up Cookie Bar in Shopify Store](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-set-up-cookie-bar-in-shopify-store/) - Shopify Cookie Bar lets you get explicit consent to collect customer data. With it, you can notify customers about cookie usage and collection. Watch this video to learn how to configure it. To learn more visit us at AppJetty: https://www.appjetty.com/shopify-comm... For any queries get back to us at support@appjetty.com https://www.youtube.com/embed/RQuPeno242k
- [How to Protect Store Content Using One of the Must Have Shopify Apps](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-protect-store-content-using-one-of-the-must-have-shopify-apps/) - Try CommerceXpand for FREE & Paid Apps → https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand Prevent theft and duplication of your store’s products and images with CommerceXpand Content Protection - best Shopify app for eCommerce. Watch this video to learn how. To learn more visit us at AppJetty: https://www.appjetty.com/shopify-comm... For any queries get back to us at support@appjetty.com https://www.youtube.com/embed/h_u6lUU9Vkc
- [Configure Geolocation IP Blocker with CommerceXpand](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/configure-geolocation-ip-blocker-with-commercexpand/) - Try CommerceXpand for FREE & Paid Apps → https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand Want to get rid of the unwanted traffic to your store? Watch this video to learn how you can block the unwanted traffic to your store from specific countries and IP addresses using CommerceXpand Geolocation IP Blocker - best Shopify app for eCommerce. To learn more
- [Shopify CommerceXpand: How to Setup Auto External Links](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/shopify-commercexpand-how-to-setup-auto-external-links/) - CommerceXpand is a Shopify product bundle that brings together 25+ apps to enhance customer experience. This tutorial covers the Auto External Links app, one of the 25+ vital apps of CommerceXpand that helps merchants and their customers to open all the store links in separate tab. To learn more visit us at AppJetty: https://www.appjetty.com/shopify-comm... https://www.youtube.com/embed/cWkZg7EwQFw
- [Order Export Shopify app Setup Tutorial - CommerceXpand](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/order-export-shopify-app-setup-tutorial-commercexpand/) - Manage your customers' orders with Order Export Shopify app. Learn how to schedule the and set the frequency of the export with CommerceXpand - all-in-one Shopify app. To learn more visit us at AppJetty: https://www.appjetty.com/shopify-comm... For any queries get back to us at support@appjetty.com https://www.youtube.com/embed/KDnPF7D6GK0
- [Customize the Back to Top Button for Shopify Store Using CommerceXpand](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/customize-the-back-to-top-button-for-shopify-store-using-commercexpand/) - Try CommerceXpand for FREE & Paid Apps → https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand Scrolling the web page up and down is a bit tedious. Here’s how you can do it in an easy way with one of the must have Shopify apps, i.e. CommerceXpand. Watch this video tutorial to configure and customize the Scroll to Top button’s appearance, color,
- [CommerceXpand Volume Discounts Shopify App: Tutorial](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/commercexpand-volume-discounts-shopify-app-tutorial/) - CommerceXpand is a one stop solution for your upselling strategies. It offers 25+ apps in one package to build trust, capture leads, boost revenue, increase conversions, and more. This video covers the Volume Discounts App that helps merchants offer volume discounts and increase average order value. For any queries get back to us at support@appjetty.com
- [Configure Recently Viewed Products - CommerceXpand](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/configure-recently-viewed-products-commercexpand/) - Make it easy for your customers to navigate back to your eCommerce store with CommerceXpand's Recently Viewed Products. Learn how to configure it. To learn more visit us at AppJetty: https://www.appjetty.com/shopify-comm... For any queries get back to us at support@appjetty.com Follow us on social media for insights and best practices https://www.youtube.com/embed/geksvxJjhO4
- [CommerceXpand Favicon Cart Count App Tutorial for Shopify](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/commercexpand-favicon-cart-count-app-tutorial-for-shopify/) - Favicon Cart Count app displays the number of items in cart over browser's favicon. In this video, you'll learn how to configure CommerceXpand Favicon Cart Count app. To learn more visit us at AppJetty: https://www.appjetty.com/shopify-comm... For any queries get back to us at support@appjetty.com https://www.youtube.com/embed/mhY3jXaQdyY
- [Configure CommerceXpand’s Inactive Tab Favicon for Shopify](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/configure-commercexpands-inactive-tab-favicon-for-shopify/) - Try CommerceXpand for FREE & Paid Apps → https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand Want to notify customers about the inactive tab with a custom message? Here’s a video tutorial to explain how you can customize an inactive tab message with a favicon on your store’s browser tab with CommerceXpand - one of the best Shopify apps for eCommerce. To
- [CommerceXpand: Customize & Set Up TimeZone with Shopify Countdown Manager App](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/commercexpand-customize-set-up-timezone-with-shopify-countdown-manager-app/) - Try CommerceXpand for FREE & Paid Apps → https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand Instantly create a custom countdown timer that down every minute, seconds, and hours to any date. Design button, customize colors, configure duration, and set the position using CommerceXpand Countdown Manager Extension - a Shopify app to increase sales. CommerceXpand Countdown Manager has the potential to drive
- [How to Customize Abandoned Cart Notification Email on Shopify](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-customize-abandoned-cart-notification-email-on-shopify/) - Try CommerceXpand for FREE & Paid Apps → https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand Discover how to configure the email template to send notifications to the customers. See how you can set a logo, add content, and preview the email in real-time using the best abandoned cart app Shopify offers. To learn more visit us at AppJetty: https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand For any
- [How to Customize the Back In Stock Alerts for Shopify](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-customize-the-back-in-stock-alerts-for-shopify/) - Try CommerceXpand for FREE & Paid Apps → https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand Set up the back in store alert on the product page and customize it according to your store’s theme. Learn how to configure the button’s appearance, customize the email templates and edit the content accordingly with CommerceXpand - a collection of must have Shopify apps. To
- [Add Quick Buy Button to your Shopify Store](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/add-quick-buy-button-to-your-shopify-store/) - Try CommerceXpand for FREE & Paid Apps → https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand Reduce your customers' effort and shorten the checkout process with CommerceXpand’s Quick Buy - one of the must have Shopify apps. This video will help you set up the Quick Buy Button and different styles to match your Shopify store’s theme. To learn more visit us
- [How to Configure Sticky Cart Shopify App to Boost Sales](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-configure-sticky-cart-shopify-app-to-boost-sales/) - Try CommerceXpand for FREE & Paid Apps → https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand Know how to configure and set up Sticky cart for desktop and mobile. Set the position, and configure the color, size, icon with these few steps. To learn more visit us at AppJetty: https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand For any queries get back to us at support@appjetty.com https://www.youtube.com/embed/YspyjMAteyY
- [Pre Order Shopify Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/pre-order-shopify-configurations/) - CommerceXpand is a bundle of 20+ Shopify apps that helps optimize store and increase sales. This video covers CommerceXpand's Pre Order Shopify app. Here you will learn how to set up the pre order app for customers to pre order the products that are out of stock or not yet released. To learn more visit
- [Create Shopify Product Bundles with CommerceXpand](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/create-shopify-product-bundles-with-commercexpand/) - Try CommerceXpand for FREE & Paid Apps → https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand Offer unmatched deals to your customers with Shopify product bundles. Learn how to create product combinations and fulfill customer expectations along with sales revenue. To learn more visit us at AppJetty: https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand For any queries get back to us at support@appjetty.com https://www.youtube.com/embed/GO7KA7n2asQ
- [Bulk Product Editor for Shopify - Easiest Way to Edit Products!](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/bulk-product-editor-for-shopify-easiest-way-to-edit-products/) - Try CommerceXpand for FREE & Paid Apps → https://apps.shopify.com/commercexpand Learn how to edit the product details for bulk products and Shopify product bundles by selecting specific attributes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/NXe4RvEyR0E
- [Get started with zipcode validator](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/get-started-with-zipcode-validator/) - Zipcode validator gives a proper idea about delivery to your customers. This transperancy reduces cart abandonment, and helps you convert them at a decision making point. Check out this guide to get started with Zip Code Validation extension for your Magento store. https://www.appjetty.com/magento2-zip-code-validation.htm https://www.youtube.com/embed/u0wFoZ2trTo
- [Magento Australia Post Shipping Extension from AppJetty](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/magento-australia-post-shipping-extension-from-appjetty/) - Best selling magento module that lets you integrate #AustraliaPost Shipping with your Magento store for domestic and international parcel shipping. Easily set shipping handling charges, flat rate, etc on your own. Visit the product page for more details https://www.appjetty.com/magento2-australia-post-shipping.htm https://www.youtube.com/embed/L_GFlsuPYtk
- [GeoIP Redirect Currency Switcher - Configuration steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/geoip-redirect-currency-switcher-configuration-steps/) - Here's a step by step guide to configure the currency switcher in your GeoIP redirect store. https://apps.shopify.com/appjetty-geo-location https://www.youtube.com/embed/PaMbUP4YwHs
- [Zipcode Validator for Shopify - Installation Guide](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/zipcode-validator-for-shopify-installation-guide/) - Zipcode validator helps you get an idea about the delivery, which in turn minimizes cart abandonment and brings transperency. Check out this short installation guide to get started with Zip Code Validation extension for your Shopify store. https://apps.shopify.com/appjetty-zipcode-validator https://www.youtube.com/embed/_MyB8zuU_sw
- [CommerceXpand | 20+ Shopify Apps-in-One | AppJetty](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/commercexpand-20-shopify-apps-in-one-appjetty/) - CommerceXpand is an all-in-one Shopify app that manages everything. You can level up your store’s efficiency by integrating the best bundle apps. Utilizing its features and services can enhance your store. It is most known for its features like lowering cart abandonment rate, serving speed in cost-friendly range and quick syncing data with just one
- [How to Configure Australia Post Shipping for Shopify](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-configure-australia-post-shipping-for-shopify/) - Watch this simple guide to configure your Shopify store settings with Shopify Australia Post Shipping extension. https://apps.shopify.com/australia-post https://www.youtube.com/embed/dhb4kIyzUYk
- [Shopify Delivery Date Manager by AppJetty](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/shopify-delivery-date-manager-by-appjetty/) - Give even to your customers with AppJetty’s Delivery Date Manager app for your Shopify store. Save on shipping costs, bring convenience for customers, and grow your business all at the same time. A well-managed delivery schedule that is in the interest of your customers and your business is the key to a streamlined shopping and
- [How To Add Australia Post Shipping Method In Your Magento2 Store](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-add-australia-post-shipping-method-in-your-magento2-store/) - Manage all aspects of Australia Post Shipping right from your e-commerce store through Magento 2 Australia Post Shipping Extension – one of the bestselling solutions that help retailers to integrate the functionalities of Australia Post Shipping with their store. Incorporate this tool into your eCommerce store and offer multiple shipping options, provide different delivery methods,
- [Blacklist IP and Countries using Magento 2 GeoIP Redirect](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/blacklist-ip-and-countries-using-magento-2-geoip-redirect/) - Magento 2 GeoIP Redirect extension has the potential to help you restrict certain IPs or countries. Watch this vido to learn what steps you need to follow in the store backend. https://www.appjetty.com/magento2-geolocation-store-switcher.htm https://www.youtube.com/embed/nzyxlkKRDkc
- [StarTrack Shipping Magento Extension from AppJetty](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/startrack-shipping-magento-extension-from-appjetty/) - With #StarTrack Shipping #Magentoextension #Australian merchants can integrate #StarTrackShipping service into their #Magentostore and fetch live shipping rates from StarTrack Shipping for various destinations within #Australia. https://www.appjetty.com/magento2-startrack-shipping.htm The admin can select the options for startrack shipping like, city, state, PIN code, shipping modes, and charges applied. Admin can select relevant length, height, width attributes as
- [Magento mobile app and extension - MageMob Admin from AppJetty](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/magento-mobile-app-and-extension-magemob-admin-from-appjetty/) - With MageMob Admin, you can manage your magento store backend from mobile. Get new order notifications, check order details, track order fulfillment and do much more with MageMob Admin mobile app and extension. Visit the product page for more details https://www.appjetty.com/magento2-magemob-admin.htm MageMob Admin is a Magento Store Manager Mobile Application that helps you to manage
- [Magento Inventory Management App & Extension - MageMob Inventory from AppJetty](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/magento-inventory-management-app-extension-magemob-inventory-from-appjetty/) - Manage stocks, warehouses and suppliers on-the-go, allowing you to ensure no stock-outs or unwanted order cancellations. It is a combo of a #MagentoExtension & #Android & #iOS based magento mobile app that simplifies your magento inventory management woes. Visit the product page for more details: https://www.appjetty.com/magento2-magemob-inventory.htm https://www.youtube.com/embed/54HeBRxyL5Y
- [Magento 2 Mobile App Builder - AppJetty](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/magento-2-mobile-app-builder-appjetty/) - Now create a native app of your Magento e-store in less than a week with our Magento 2 app builder. Reach more customers and drive more sales by building a native Magento 2 mobile app with our MageMob App Builder. A pre-configured framework that enables you to launch your app within a week. In Magento
- [Magento Australia Post eParcel Extension from AppJetty](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/magento-australia-post-eparcel-extension-from-appjetty/) - Manage Australia Post eParcel Shipping right within your Magento store without having to go to #AustraliaPosteParcel Portal. This magento plugin allows you to fetch live rates, manage consignments, print consignment labels and track your shipments. No manual data import or export, no unnecessary expenditure on label printing. Visit the product page for more details https://www.appjetty.com/magento2-australia-post-parcel-send.htm
- [Custom Auto Numbering - Dynamics CRM Plugin from AppJetty](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/custom-auto-numbering-dynamics-crm-plugin-from-appjetty/) - Microsoft Dynamics CRM Auto Numbering Plugin is an effective tool to manage your numbering pattern in the CRM. We understand that not all businesses have same nature of requirements to label their records. However, it is essential to automate them nevertheless. For more details visit the product page: https://www.appjetty.com/dynamicscrm-custom-auto-numbering.htm https://www.youtube.com/embed/U9Kd3qCA45w
- [Dynamics CRM Stock Management Plugin from AppJetty](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/dynamics-crm-stock-management-plugin-from-appjetty/) - Stock Assistant Add-on for Dynamics CRM allows users to manage and keep track of the stock of all their products. The Plug-in helps users to set the inward and outward stock quantity of particular products along with its reason and other important details, thus making stock management more efficient and smooth. https://www.youtube.com/embed/u-piuzdkUb0
- [Dropshipping Manager: Manual order Fullfillment](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/dropshipping-manager-manual-order-fullfillment/) - Here's a complete guide on how to setup manual order fulfillments using your Shopify dropshipping manager extension. https://apps.shopify.com/dropshipping-manager https://www.youtube.com/embed/HlqndHs-0-M
- [Shopify Language Translator By AppJetty](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/shopify-language-translator-by-appjetty/) - Swiftly translate your Magento 2 store with our Language Translation extension. You get incredible features like mass translation, a WYSIWYG editor, and more. Local languages help you build better connections across the globe. And better connections are better for your business. Reach us at: (Contact us link) for any questions you have. Visit our Website
- [Can I Translate Third-Party Modules-Wise Static Keywords?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-translate-third-party-modules-wise-static-keywords/) - Navigate to the Appjetty Translator ➤ Manage Translation ➤ Module Static Data Translate, you will land on the Manage Translation page.
- [Can I Translate a Category?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-translate-category/) - Yes, the admins can translate the categories of their store all at once. Just select the categories in your store and do the following configurations.
- [What is the Character Limit for the Translation?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-is-the-character-limit-for-the-translation/) - Navigate to the Stores ➤ Configuration you will land on the Configuration page. Now scroll down to the Translator Configuration page and do the following configurations.
- [How Can I Translate Using Console](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-translate-using-console/) - Navigate to the Catalogs ➤ Products, you will land on the “Products” page. From the product listing page, click on the Filters option to translate the products by selecting a specific store.
- [When Can I Use the Cron Translation?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/when-can-use-cron-translation/) - You can use the Cron process when you want to translate the product attributes and Meta details of a specific page from one language to another page.
- [Can We Manage Translation Based on the Storeview?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-we-manage-translation-based-storeview/) - Navigate to AppJetty Translator ➤ Manage Translation, you will land on the “Manage Translation” page. By clicking on the “Module Static Data Translate” the admin can translate.
- [Can I Check the Logs of the Translation? If Yes, Then How?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-check-logs-translation-yes-then-how/) - Navigate to AppJetty Translator ➤ Bulk Product Translation, you will land on the “AppJetty Mass Product Translator” page. You can easily check the translation logs
- [Can We Use Other API Ex. DeepL API Instead of Google Translator API?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-use-other-api-ex-deepl-api-instead-google-translator-api/) - Just integrate Google API with Language Translator and one can proceed. Other than that you can also use other APIs like DeepL API.
- [Does it Support the Delivery Date in API We Need to Integrate With Other Systems?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/does-it-support-the-delivery-date-in-api-we-need-to-integrate-with-other-systems/) - Yes, we do provide API for our modules. API makes the integration process easier with any other extension. Below are the images which will give you the details.
- [How Can I Manage My Licenced Users in Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-manage-my-licenced-users-calendar-365/) - To manage the license users, click on the Configuration button and you will land on the Setup page. Now navigate to the Profile section and you can see the Manage Users section.
- [What is Account and Contact Calendar Selection in Configuration of Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/account-and-contact-calendar-selection-in-configuration-calendar-365/) - You can select the entities related to contact you want to include in the calendar. Entities related to Contact are leads, opportunities, Cases, Quotas, Sales Orders, Invoices.
- [What are Buttons Configuration Selections in Activity Settings?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/buttons-configuration-selections-in-activity-settings/) - Click on the Configuration button, you will land on the Setup page. Under the Activities section, you will get the Button Configuration field.
- [How Can I Generate Google Calendar API Key?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-generate-google-calendar-api-key/) - Click on the Configuration button, you will land on the Setup page. Now scroll down to the Holidays section and click on the How to generate Google Calendar API Key?
- [How Can I Generate Google Autocomplete API Key?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-generate-google-autocomplete-api-key/) - Click on the Configuration button, you will land on the Setup page. Now scroll down to the Locations section and click on the How to generate Google Autocomplete API Key?
- [What is the Location Feature in Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/whats-location-feature-in-calendar-365/) - If the location suggestions are active from the Configuration page then you can even get the suggestions based on the keywords.
- [How Can I Differentiate Activities by Business Units?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-differentiate-activities-by-business-units/) - The business unit lets you create different departments or provisions that have separate products, customers, and marketing lists.
- [How Can I Set the Custom Slot Duration As Per My Business Needs?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-set-custom-slot-duration-as-per-my-business-needs/) - Here you will get the Slot Duration field. Select the duration of the field from 15, 30, 45, 60, 90 minutes. After configuring the field click on the Save button to save the configurations.
- [How Can I Change Slot Duration in Top-Down View?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-change-slot-duration-in-top-down-view/) - Want to change the slot duration in the Top-Down View? You can do it in a couple of steps. Get along with these steps.
- [How Can I Change Title Format in Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-change-title-format-in-calendar-365/) - Want to change the title format in Calendar 365? You can do it within few steps. Here is how you can do it.
- [How Can I View Activities for 2-5 Days in Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-view-activities-for-calendar-365/) - Click on the Configuration button and you will get the Number of Days field in the Setup section. Now set the no. of day you want to view in the calendar view.
- [Can the Similar Activity be Created Easily Without Creating It From Scratch?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-the-similar-activity-created-easily-without-creating-from-scratch/) - After clicking on the Copy button, the Copy Activity section will open up. If you want to change anything in the activity you can do it. After the configurations click on the “Create” button.
- [How to Schedule Unscheduled Activities](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-schedule-unscheduled-activities/) - If any activity is unscheduled then you will get the list of the unscheduled activities by following the below steps.
- [How Can I Mark Holidays in the Calendar?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-mark-holidays-in-the-calendar/) - Navigate to the Configurations section by clicking on the Configurations button. Now scroll down to the Holidays section and do the following configurations.
- [Can I Configure Which Attributes to Show on the Details Card?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/configure-which-attributes-show-on-the-details-card/) - Navigate to the Configurations section by clicking on the Configurations button. Now scroll down to the Activities section and you will see the Details Attributes field.
- [What is Setting Up Regarding Action?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/whats-setting-up-regarding-action/) - After selecting click on the “Save” button to set regarding for the record. As you click on the Save button, the popup message will be appeared to set regarding.
- [Can I Configure Which Attributes to Show on the Tooltip?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-configure-which-attributes-show-on-the-tooltip/) - To set up the Tooltip view of activity, click on the Settings button, you will land on the “Setup” page. Now you will find the “Tooltip Attribute” option of the activity.
- [How to Add Other Team Members as Required/Optional Attendees](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-add-other-team-members-as-required-optional-attendees/) - You can also share the appointment with other users (team members) at the same time when you are creating an Appointment activity.
- [Can We Assign a Created Activity to Some Other User?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-we-assign-a-created-activity-to-some-other-user/) - You can easily assign the created activity to other users by following the below instructions. To reassign any activity, click on activity. If opens a dialog box. Click on the “Re-assign” icon
- [How can I set up multiple activities in Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-set-up-multiple-activities-in-calendar-365/) - As you open the Calendar 365 application, you can see an Activities option in the Resource Calendar. There are multiple entities available under the Activities option.
- [Can We Set the Working Hours of the User in the Calendar?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-we-set-the-working-hours-of-the-user-in-the-calendar/) - To set and edit the working hours in CRM, navigate to Advanced Settings ➤ Security ➤ Users ➤ Select the user for which you want to set working hours.
- [Would I Get an Alert on Activity Creation When It’s Not Within Working Hours?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/would-i-get-an-alert-on-activity-creation-when-its-not-within-working-hours/) - Now scroll down to the Conflict Management section and activate it. After activating it, click on the Save button to save the configurations.
- [How Can I Get a Refund?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-get-a-refund/) - Software procurement is a somewhat complicated process. In a standard situation, it goes through various touch focuses when the purchasing cycle.
- [Can I Set the Available Date and Time of Product Delivery for my Shopper?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-i-set-the-available-date-and-time-of-product-delivery-for-my-shopper/) - Yes, you can set the available time and date of product delivery for your shopper. Follow the below instructions to set the date and timings of delivery.
- [Does Delivery Date Extension Offer the Facility to let Customers Choose "Call Me Before Delivery"?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/does-delivery-date-extension-offer-the-facility-to-let-customers-choose-call-me-before-delivery/) - Go to Stores ➤ Backend ➤ AppJetty ➤ Delivery Date, you will land on the “Configuration” page. Now scroll down to the Front End Configurations section and do the following configurations.
- [Are Customers Allowed to Add Extra Comments Regarding the Order?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/are-customers-allowed-to-add-extra-comments-regarding-the-order/) - Go to Stores ➤ Configurations ➤ AppJetty ➤ Delivery Date you will and on the “Configuration” page. Now scroll down to the Front End Configurations section.
- [Is it Possible to Manage Holiday/Off Days?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/is-it-possible-to-manage-holiday-off-days/) - Go to Stores ➤ Configurations ➤ Delivery Date you will land on the “Configuration” page. Now scroll down to the Day Off Settings section and do the following configurations.
- [If I Need Additional Features to be Added to an AppJetty Extension, How can I Ask for them?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/if-i-need-additional-features-to-be-added-to-an-appjetty-extension-how-can-i-ask-for-them/) - To add the additional features, you can reach out to us. You can mail us with your requirements. You can call us directly or connect us with live chat.
- [Is it Possible to Add certain Time Slots for Delivery Goods?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/is-it-possible-to-add-certain-time-slots-for-delivery-goods/) - Go to Stores ➤ Configurations ➤ AppJetty ➤ Delivery Date, you will land on the “Configuration” page. Now scroll down to the Time Slots Settings section and do the following configurations.
- [Can Shoppers Change the Delivery Date & Time on the Front End before the Order is Shipped?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-shoppers-change-the-delivery-date-time-on-the-front-end-before-the-order-is-shipped/) - Go to Stores ➤ Configurations ➤ AppJetty ➤ Delivery Date, you will land on the “Configuration” page. Now scroll down to the Update Delivery Date section and do the following configurations.
- [Can We Integrate the Marketplace Seller?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-we-integrate-the-marketplace-seller/) - Our extension works with the default flow which doesn’t support the marketplace seller module. You can contact us with your requirements and we can make it compatible.
- [Can We Have Cutoff Time for the Delivery of Same Day?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-we-have-cutoff-time-for-the-delivery-of-same-day/) - Go to Stores ➤ Configurations ➤ AppJetty ➤ Delivery Date, you will land on the “Configuration” page. Now scroll down to the “Delivery Date Related Configuration” section.
- [Can We Customize Delivery Processing Time Flow as Per Our Business Needs?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-we-customize-delivery-processing-time-flow-as-per-our-business-needs/) - Go to Stores ➤ Configurations ➤ AppJetty ➤ Delivery Date, you will land on the “Configuration” page. Now scroll down to the “Time slot settings” section and do the following configurations.
- [Does it Support Multiple Address Checkout?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/does-it-support-multiple-address-checkout/) - Our extension lets your shopper choose the delivery date and time. Not only does it let your customer choose the date and time but also it supports multiple address checkout options.
- [Can I Disable Particular Time Slot?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-i-disable-particular-time-slot/) - Go to Stores ➤ Configurations ➤ AppJetty ➤ Delivery Date, you will land on the “Configuration” page. Now scroll down to the “Time slot settings” section and do the following configurations.
- [Can I Disable a Particular Whole Day?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-i-disable-a-particular-whole-day/) - Go to Stores ➤ Configurations ➤ AppJetty ➤ Delivery Date, you will land on the “Configuration” page. Now scroll down to the “Day Off Settings” sections.
- [Can you Customize your Extension based on our Business Requirements?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-you-customize-your-extension-based-on-our-business-requirements/) - Yes, you can get a customized extension based on your business requirements. You just have to contact us with your requirements and we will get it done for you.
- [Can We Integrate it with Other Systems for Delivery Management and Order Processing?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-we-integrate-it-with-other-systems-for-delivery-management-and-order-processing/) - Yes, you can use our API for delivery management and order processing. You can contact us with your requirements and our team will provide you the best possible solution with our integration.
- [Can We Add Delivery Processing Time by Cart Item or Specific Product?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-we-add-delivery-processing-time-by-cart-item-or-specific-product/) - Yes, you can configure the processing time globally as well as by-product level. Follow the below instructions to add delivery processing time.
- [Can We Allow Delivery Date for Customer Group Only?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-we-allow-delivery-date-for-customer-group-only/) - Go to stores ➤ Configurations ➤ AppJetty ➤ Delivery Date, you will land on the “Configuration” page. Now scroll down to the “Delivery Date Related Configurations” section.
- [Can We Set up the Delivery Date for Specific Shipping Methods like FedEx and Hide for Methods like Store Pickup?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-we-set-up-the-delivery-date-for-specific-shipping-methods-like-fedex-and-hide-for-methods-like-store-pickup/) - Go to Stores ➤ Configurations ➤ AppJetty ➤ Delivery Date, you will land on the “Configuration” page. Now scroll down to the “Delivery Date Related Configurations” section.
- [Can the Delivery Date be Selected for Each Product?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-the-delivery-date-be-selected-for-each-product/) - Go to Stores ➤ Configurations ➤ AppJetty ➤ Delivery Date, you will land on the “Configuration” page. Now scroll down to the “Delivery Date Related Configurations” section.
- [Can I Set a Delivery Date & Time if I Accept Orders by Phone and Create Orders from the Backend Manually?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-i-set-a-delivery-date-time-if-i-accept-orders-by-phone-and-create-orders-from-the-backend-manually/) - To create the order from the backend go to Sales ➤ Orders, you will land on the “Orders” page. Now click on the “Create New Order” button and select the customer.
- [Can I Request a Free Trial?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-i-request-a-free-trial/) - AppJetty doesn't offer a free trial for Magento 2 Delivery Date expansion. Nonetheless, we give 90-day free support included inside the purchase sum.
- [Can I Test This Extension on a Staging Site Before Transferring it to a Live One?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-i-test-this-extension-on-a-staging-site-before-transferring-it-to-a-live-one/) - Also, we provide a 1-month testing domain including a key with which you can test this extension on a staging site. Also, we do not take any additional charges for it.
- [How can I Receive a Discount?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-receive-a-discount/) - Normally we do not offer a discount on any of our products. We roll out offers on special occasions or festivals where you can purchase the products at a discounted price.
- [How to Update a Magento 2 AppJetty Extension?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-update-a-magento-2-appjetty-extension/) - Subsequent to executing the above order your module is updated and now you simply need to run the update order as mentioned below.
- [Does the Extension Support the Paypal Express Checkout Flow?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/does-the-extension-support-the-paypal-express-checkout-flow/) - Yes, our extension supports the Paypal express checkout flow. Looking at the global scenario as there are various gateways used by the people, our extension supports multiple payment gateways as well.
- [Can it Support some Third-Party Module One Step Checkout?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-it-support-some-third-party-module-one-step-checkout/) - But when any third-party module has any modifications inflow then slight customization is required in the Delivery Date Scheduler extension.
- [Do You have the Installation Service?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/do-you-have-the-installation-service/) - Yes, we do offer an installation service for our extensions at an additional fixed cost. While doing the installation of our extension on your store and add similarity with the default Magento theme.
- [Will I Get Free Support?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/will-i-get-free-support/) - As a part of our support services, we will address questions related to our products, fix the errors/bugs, and ensure that our product works precisely the manner in which we have guaranteed it ought to.
- [Is There Any Way I Can See How the Extension Works?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/is-there-any-way-i-can-see-how-the-extension-works/) - To view the live demo, click on the Live Demo tab. Now click on the Backend to view the Backend store or click on the Frontend to view the frontend store.
- [Will I Receive Extension Updates?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/will-i-receive-extension-updates/) - Yes, we offer lifetime free updates for the Delivery Date Scheduler. We offer updates and improve our extensions on a timely basis.
- [Does App Supports Multi Website/Multi-Currency?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/does-app-supports-multi-website-multi-currency/) - Yes, App supports the multiple websites of the single domain and multi-currency functionality of a single website/store.
- [How Does Search with Barcode Works?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-does-search-with-barcode-works/) - You can even enable search with a barcode feature, to enable your customers to search the product with a barcode. Here is how you can enable it.
- [Does this Support Multi-Vendor Module?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/does-this-support-multi-vendor-module/) - This app doesn’t provide support for multi-vendor stores. But if you want multi-vendor support then you can have it as per your requirement.
- [Does it Support Multiple Languages?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/does-it-support-multiple-languages/) - Yes, the app supports multiple language functionality. The language will be based on your store location. You just have to share the information and requirements with the support team.
- [How to Configure the Homepage from the Admin Panel](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-configure-the-homepage-from-the-admin-panel/) - Magemob App Builder comes with robust functionality with which you admins can configure the homepage from the Backend. Below are the steps.
- [Does the App Supports Guest Checkout?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/does-the-app-supports-guest-checkout/) - Yes, our app supports guest checkout. If you want this feature to be enabled in your store, then you have connected with our support team with your requirements.
- [Does the App Supports Bundle Product?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/does-the-app-supports-bundle-product/) - To get the bundle product in your store one has to pay extra charges. To enable the bundle product in your store you can connect to our support team.
- [Does the App Supports Product Comparison Functionality?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/does-the-app-supports-product-comparison-functionality/) - Yes, the app supports the compare product functionality. This functionality mainly refers to the comparison of the product. To avail of this functionality, you can contact our support team.
- [Does the App Supports the Latest Operating Systems in iOS and Android?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/does-the-app-supports-the-latest-operating-systems-in-ios-and-android/) - Yes, our app supports the certain latest OS in iOS and Android. Here are the supported version for iOS and Android.
- [Will I Receive Extension Updates?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/will-i-receive-extension-updates-2/) - Yes, you will receive the extension updates from our side. The updates will be free of cost if there are no major changes. In case if there are major changes you have to pay the extra price.
- [Is There a Way to See How the Extension and Application Works?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/is-there-a-way-to-see-how-the-extension-and-application-works/) - Yes, you can have a personalized demo to see the functionalities of the extension and application. You just have to request a demo by following the below steps.
- [Which Searching Techniques Does the App Provide?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/which-searching-techniques-does-the-app-provide/) - There are multiple searching techniques that your shopper can apply. They can search by keywords, search with barcodes, and voice search functionality.
- [Can You Provide the Source Code of the Application?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-you-provide-the-source-code-of-the-application/) - Yes, we provide the source code of the application. Kindly get in touch with the support team of the Appjetty for further queries.
- [How Can I Set Default Configuration Settings?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-set-default-configuration-settings/) - The default configuration settings include Views, Activities, Owner Color, Business Unit, Unscheduled Activities, Conflict Management, Notification, Holidays, Locations, Upcoming Events. To set them to follow the below instructions.
- [What is the Use of the Read-Only Feature while Adding New Custom Activity on Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-is-the-use-of-the-read-only-feature-while-adding-new-custom-activity-on-calendar-365/) - When you are adding a Custom Activity in Calendar 365 you can make that activity as Read Only. If the activity is Read-Only then only the Admin can make changes in it.
- [What is the use of Shared Calendar Feature in Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-is-the-use-of-shared-calendar-feature-in-calendar-365/) - In Calendar 365, when you save a Calendar, you can either keep it Private or you can keep it Public. If you save the Calendar as Public you and your team will have access to the Calendar.
- [How to work Appointment Planner in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-work-appointment-planner-in-mappyfield-365/) - With the Appointment Planner in MappyField 365, you can create an appointment within no time. You can get an overview of your daily activities marked with priority according to our Dynamics 365 field mapping. https://www.youtube.com/embed/q7sFDBR_fgw
- [How to Work Shape Operations in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-work-shape-operations-in-mappyfield-365/) - In MappyField 365 you will get the drawing feature, to draw the shapes on the map using the tool. The drawing feature lets you create the territory in a simple way. To explore more about shape operations, have a look at this video. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ta4GG4RPJzI
- [How to Multilanguage Configuration and Functionality in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-multilanguage-configuration-and-functionality-in-mappyfield-365/) - In MappyField 365, admin can set multiple languages to the map. Users will get the list of language selection menus in the Language Configuration field. Users can get any language and edit the plugin text. https://www.youtube.com/embed/I1nPErnbmVk
- [How to set Targeted Marketing [Marketing List] in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-set-targeted-marketing-marketing-list-in-mappyfield-365/) - With the targeted marketing feature, your marketing department will have the right data of the highest-grossing clients and areas. One can get an overview of the data plotted on the Map. To know more about targeted marketing, watch this video. https://www.youtube.com/embed/zkSC3YDfuYw
- [How to set User Level Configurations in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-set-user-level-configurations-in-mappyfield-365/) - You can personalize the view on the individual user level and simplify the work with customization. You can set the map mode, zoom level, route option, default location to load by default for your individual resources. https://www.youtube.com/embed/cCFN6MlvBc8
- [How MappyField 365 Helps Sales Executives](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-mappyfield-365-helps-sales-executives/) - Sales executives can plot the record by selecting the entities and records view. They can view the saved route and perform other activities as per the user rights given by the sales manager. Here is a video. https://www.youtube.com/embed/-B205lhPpHQ
- [How MappyField 365 Helps Sales Manager](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-mappyfield-365-helps-sales-manager/) - MappyField 365 comes with the default and custom dashboard to check and analyze the daily activities. The sales manager can check and open the lead status from the activity dashboard. This will provide a list of records on the map. https://www.youtube.com/embed/J03ug85ntxw
- [How MappyField 365 Helps Marketing Managers](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-mappyfield-365-helps-marketing-managers/) - The marketing manager can filter the records based on the country list. They can also send an email to the users by selecting the relevant templates. Here is the video to know more about how MappyFiled 365 is helpful to marketing managers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b9Q1vJsnAxg
- [How MappyField 365 Helps in Streamlining Sales Operations](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-mappyfield-365-helps-in-streamlining-sales-operations/) - You can train your workforce in less time by giving them visual insights into their available opportunities, territories, and leads. You can get the geographical representation of the CRM data using the Heat map. On top of this, a streamlined territory management makes for smoother operations. https://www.youtube.com/embed/sIUHEFbwZVQ
- [MappyField 365 - Dynamics 365 Map Integration](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/mappyfield-365-dynamics-365-map-integration/) - Now have the quick visualization of your Dynamics CRM data on a map and make a data-backed decision for your sales team with MappyField 365. It is an easy-to-integrate plugin to assist your sales and marketing manager effectively. https://www.youtube.com/embed/F2zUFXWKIi0
- [Get your Website Ready For the World](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/get-your-website-ready-for-the-world/) - Now translate your website into different languages with a few steps. AppJetty’s Magento 2 Language Translation extension is a complete solution that enhances the capabilities of Google Translation API. Feel free to translate anything right from meta details, CMS Pages Content as well as reviews. https://www.youtube.com/embed/R3aeqGRN2HY
- [Search, Translate, Connect with Language Translator](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/search-translate-connect-with-language-translator/) - Translating every component could be a tedious task. That is why we have a search and translate feature in the AppJetty Language Translator for Magento 2. All you need to know is the language in which you want the translation to be done. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Sgf90Vi6jvE
- [Mass Translate your Magento 2 Store With Language Translator Extension](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/mass-translate-your-magento-2-store-with-language-translator-extension/) - Now translate your store content in just a few steps with the AppJetty Magento 2 Language Translator Extension. Select the product, select the language you want to translate it to, and hit Translate! Your store is ready to go as per the configuration. https://www.youtube.com/embed/2yeN7yG_KY8
- [Get Started with Language Translation!](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/get-started-with-language-translation/) - Language is the thing that helps you connect with the local audience. This will help you reach a global audience. Now translate multiple store fields to any desired language in a matter of minutes. https://www.youtube.com/embed/FV3fHomQdts
- [How To Configure Language Translator Extension In Your Magento 2 Store](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-configure-language-translator-extension-in-your-magento-2-store/) - Configuring the language translator extension in your Magento 2 store is a very easy task. You don’t have to take the hassle of converting the content into an Excel sheet and importing back to your website. In just a few clicks, you can have translated content! https://www.youtube.com/embed/zDjowGoHRV0
- [Configure Magento 2 Estimated Delivery Date Extension on Checkout](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/configure-magento-2-estimated-delivery-date-extension-on-checkout/) - With this Magento 2 Extension, you can manage the deliveries conveniently. This extension will allow your customers to select the date and time of the delivery. You can even configure the option on the cart page or the checkout page. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9pJWOOephXg
- [Set Up Magento 2 Delivery Date Extension on Product Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/set-up-magento-2-delivery-date-extension-on-product-page/) - Encourage your users to select the date and time of the delivery on the product page itself. You can set the order processing time, Cut off hours, Cut off Minutes, Cut off Seconds. You can even add the additional charges for any order as per the requirement. https://www.youtube.com/embed/aKgTAIOCl40
- [Manage Magento 2 Delivery Date and Time Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/manage-magento-2-delivery-date-and-time-settings/) - Magento 2 Delivery Date Extension has everything you need to schedule the deliveries. You can set the available date and time of the available deliveries. You can exclude the holidays from the processing days. It helps in creating a seamless shipping experience for your customers. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Z4MqbIMhP9w
- [How to Add a Magento 2 Delivery Date Extension on Cart Page?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-add-a-magento-2-delivery-date-extension-on-cart-page/) - With the Magento 2 Plugin you can avail the date and time selection for the delivery easily. Just follow a couple of steps and that’s it. You can set the order processing time, charges on the same day, cut off time, timer for the same day, and much more. https://www.youtube.com/embed/f9PqLQ4_iMo
- [What is the Auto Scheduling Feature?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-is-the-auto-scheduling-feature/) - The Auto Scheduling feature in MappyField 365 lets you automatically schedule a number of records. In the Auto-Schedule feature, you will have to input details like Start Date, Start Location, End Location.
- [What are Default Configuration settings to use Mappyfield 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-are-default-configuration-settings-to-use-mappyfield-365/) - To manage the default configuration settings for Admin users, click on the ‘Setup’ tab. Now select the Default Configurations option.
- [How can I get Geocode for Records in MappyField 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-get-geocode-for-records-in-mappyfield-365/) - To get Geocode for the records Navigate to the Accounts tab in Dynamics 365 and click on the 3-dot icon. In the icon, you can see an option called Get Geocode.
- [How can I Configure my own Dashboard?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-configure-my-own-dashboard/) - To configure your own Dashboard in MappyField 365, navigate to Dashboard Configuration and click on the New option available on the tab. Now add the Name, Entity Name, and Patch XML for the new Dashboard Configuration.
- [What is the Security Template feature?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-is-the-security-template-feature/) - The Security Template Feature helps the admin provide limited access to other users’ applications. The admin can control the operation actions a user can perform based on their job description.
- [How to Create the User-wise Configuration in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-create-the-user-wise-configuration-in-mappyfield-365/) - On assignment of any role like AppJetty MappyField 365 Admin, AppJetty MappyField 365 User, or System Administrator role, configuration settings record must be created.
- [What are the Different Filters Available for Plotting the Heat Map on the Map?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-are-the-different-filters-available-for-plotting-the-heat-map-on-the-map/) - By clicking on Heat Map, the Heat Map page will be open with all default configurations and fill up with all the entities which are already configured in “Entity To Map”.
- [What are Measure and Filter options in the Heat Map?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-are-measure-and-filter-options-in-the-heat-map/) - In the Heat Map, there are Measure and Filter options. Using the Measure option you can view the Measure of a selected field. And using the Filter option you can filter the result of Measure.
- [Where can I Watch My Today's Check-in and All check-in/check-out Data?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/where-can-i-watch-my-todays-check-in-and-all-check-in-check-out-data/) - In MappyField 365, there is a Check-Ins tab on the left panel of the application. Open the tab, and you will see the My Check-Ins options.
- [How Does Check-In and Check-Out Work?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-does-check-in-and-check-out-work/) - In MappyField 365 a user has to Check-In to perform any assigned activity, and he/she has to Check-Out after completion of the activity. Check-In: A user can check-in to an activity only if he is in the check-in radius.
- [How can I Create Bulk Appointments or Tasks in Mappyfield 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-create-bulk-appointments-or-tasks-in-mappyfield-365/) - To create bulk appointments or tasks in the MappyField 365, follow the following steps; First of all click on the Show Data tab which is present on the bottom-center of the screen.
- [How can I Add Records to a New or Existing Marketing List?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-add-records-to-a-new-or-existing-marketing-list/) - To add records in a new or an existing marketing list in MappyField 365 follow the following steps; First of all click on the record that you want to add in the marketing list.
- [How can I create an activity for plotted records in Mappyfield 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-create-an-activity-for-plotted-records-in-mappyfield-365/) - In MappyField 365 you can create 2 types of activities for any record. You can add Tasks and Add Appointments as activities for any record.
- [How can I Find a Nearby Location of a record in Mappyfield 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-find-a-nearby-location-of-a-record-in-mappyfield-365/) - In MappyField 365 you can see Point of Interests near any plotted record. You can view nearby Hotels, Restaurants, Airports, Petrol Pumps, etc. of any plotted record.
- [How can I create a route in Mappyfield 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-create-a-route-in-mappyfield-365/) - In MappyField 365 you can save important or most used routes. You can also assign those routes to other users. To create a new route follow the following steps.
- [How can I Assign Routes to Another User?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-assign-routes-to-another-user/) - In MappyField 365 you can save important or most used routes. You can also assign those routes to other users. To assign routes to another user follow the following steps;
- [What is Proximity Search and How it Works in Mappyfield 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-is-proximity-search-and-how-it-works-in-mappyfield-365/) - The results will be in proximity to the selected record based on time or distance. You can define distance either in miles or kilometers and as well as time in minutes.
- [How can I Create New Territory in Mappyfield 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-create-new-territory-in-mappyfield-365/) - To create New Territory in MappyField 365, open the MappyField 365 and follow the following steps; Navigate to the Territory Management tab on the left panel in the MappyFiled 365.
- [How Region and Drawing-wise Filters Work?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-region-and-drawing-wise-filters-work/) - In Mappyfield 365 you can plot the records of particular entities based on different Search Options. You can search and plot the records based on the five Search filters.
- [How can I set up Entities to Display in Mappyfield 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-set-up-entities-to-display-in-mappyfield-365/) - If you want to set up entities that display in the Mappyfield 365, just follow the following steps; First of all navigate to AppJetty -> Entity Mappings.
- [Where can I View the Summary of the Plotted Data?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/where-can-i-view-the-summary-of-the-plotted-data/) - To view the summary of the plotted data click on the summary card which is on the left side of the screen. After you click on the Summary Card, it will show the summary of all the plotted records.
- [How can I search records in Mappyfield 365 by Name?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-search-records-in-mappyfield-365-by-name/) - In MappyField 365 you can plot multiple records. So to find any individual record among the cluster of records can be difficult. So, MappyField has an option to search records by Name.
- [How does the Location feature work in Mappyfield 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-does-the-location-feature-work-in-mappyfield-365/) - In MappyField 365 you can add the important location like property, land inquiry purposes, etc. using the Location feature. To add a location you have to right-click on that specific location.
- [How can I Save Templates in Mappyfield 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-save-templates-in-mappyfield-365/) - In the MappyField 365 you can save all the plotting data made along with zoom level configurations as a Template. So to save Templates in MappyField 365 just follow the following steps.
- [What is Owner Color Configuration?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-is-owner-color-configuration/) - Owner Color Configuration is a feature that will help define your users with individual colors. This feature will help you differentiate user-wise.
- [How to Add Notes for a Particular Activity in Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-add-notes-for-a-particular-activity-in-calendar-365/) - To add Notes in any particular activity in Calendar 365, click on any activity and select the Notes icon which is first on the top.
- [How can I Update my View from Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-update-my-view-from-calendar-365/) - To Update any of your views in Calendar 365, find the view. As you find the view you can see an Edit icon on the top. Click on the Edit icon, make the changes you want.
- [How can I Create Activities for Different Time Slots in Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-create-activities-for-different-time-slots-in-calendar-365/) - To change the default slot and create different time slots for activities navigate to Configuration → Views → Slot Duration.
- [What are the Different Types of Buttons I can Configure for Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-are-the-different-types-of-buttons-i-can-configure-for-calendar-365/) - There are four types of Buttons you can configure for activity in Calendar 365. The Buttons are Convert to Opportunity, Convert to Case, Mark as Complete, and Mark as Cancel.
- [Can Labels of the Calendar be Updated in Another Language?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/can-labels-of-the-calendar-be-updated-in-another-language/) - Yes, the Labels in the Calendar can be updated in another language. For that, Navigate to the Configuration settings, and at the bottom of the page.
- [What is Conflict Management in Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-is-conflict-management-in-calendar-365/) - Conflict Management helps you to manage the conflicts that occur in the scheduling of appointments or any other activities. To get alerts for conflicting activities based on time.
- [How does the Email and Notification Reminder Feature Work?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-does-the-email-and-notification-reminder-feature-work/) - The Email reminder will send you an email before the selected time period of activity. And the Notification reminder will give a popup notification.
- [How can I Change Tooltip and Popup Details in Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-change-tooltip-and-popup-details-in-calendar-365/) - To change the Tooltip and Popup details for the activities in Calendar 365, navigate to the Appointment tab in Configuration settings → Activity.
- [How can I Change the Title of the Activity on Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-change-the-title-of-the-activity-on-calendar-365/) - In Calendar 365 the Title of your activities is shown on your activity in the calendar. By default, the Title Attribute will be the subject of the activity.
- [What is the use of the Overdue Activities feature in Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-is-the-use-of-the-overdue-activities-feature-in-calendar-365/) - If you have selected Yes for ‘Overdue Activities’ in the Backend configuration, the expired activities will be highlighted with a ‘red’ alert mark. This feature will help to know the expired activities and take necessary actions regarding them.
- [What is Slot Duration selection in configuration and how it affects Calendar 365’s view?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-is-slot-duration-selection-in-configuration-and-how-it-affects-calendar-365s-view/) - There are multiple options of View in Calendar 365 to check the activities and the schedule. Slot Duration is one of the views. So here are the details on how the Slot Duration View affects Calendar 365 and the procedure for configuring the Slot Duration View.
- [How can I view the activities of 2,3,4 days simultaneously in Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-view-the-activities-of-234-days-simultaneously-in-calendar-365/) - Normally, you can view your activities in Calendar 365 with three filters: Day, Week, and Month. These are the default filters to view your activities.
- [How to Search Activities in Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-search-activities-in-calendar-365/) - In Calendar 365 there is a search option on the top. You can search any activity by three options: Subject, Regarding, and Description that are inserted in the activities. Select any search option among three, add your keyword and click on the search icon
- [How can I filter the Activities based on Status and Priority?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-filter-the-activities-based-on-status-and-priority/) - To filter your activities based on Status and Priority, first of all, login to your Calendar 365 account. On the Home page, you can use the Resource Calendar tab on the left Panel.
- [How can I View the Activities of Multiple Users in Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-view-the-activities-of-multiple-users-in-calendar-365/) - To view the activities of multiple users in Calendar 365, you must have the AppJetty Calendar 365 Administrator or System Administrator. These will allow you to see the activities of multiple users.
- [How can I complete or cancel my activity from the Calendar?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-can-i-complete-or-cancel-my-activity-from-the-calendar/) - If you click on any activity on the Calendar you will get a detailed view of the activity with activity actions.
- [What does the Saved Calendar feature do?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/what-does-the-saved-calendar-feature-do/) - The Saved Calendar feature will save the view of your calendar. It will remember all the entities selected from the left panel of the calendar and save them for future use.
- [How to use custom activity in Calendar 365?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-use-custom-activity-in-calendar-365/) - We provide the function for our customers to create a custom activity in Calendar 365. Here is the step-by-step procedure on how to create a custom activity and use it.
- [How to Live User Tracking in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-live-user-tracking-in-mappyfield-365/) - With MappyField 365, you can see the live user tracking. You don’t have to communicate with the on-field sales team. You can track the activities of the users and get live updates of their spots. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZbUoiunPWD0
- [Full View of MappyField 365 Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/full-view-of-mappyfield-365-dashboard/) - MappyField 365 offers a geo-analytical solution to Dynamics 365 users and helps them to plot CRM data in maps. You will get a smart overview of sales activity, performance, follow-up data and plan your daily and monthly activity accordingly. https://www.youtube.com/embed/JGzQAEb1bVk
- [How to Heat Map Visualization in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-heat-map-visualization-in-mappyfield-365/) - With the Heat Map Visualization, you can analyze the data effectively. This helps you in tracking real-time data analyzing with robust visualization. You can create a heat map area-wise with different charts like pie charts and column charts. https://www.youtube.com/embed/4oa_n3oXnSY
- [How to Territory Creation/Territory Management in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-territory-creation-territory-management-in-mappyfield-365/) - You can create and manage the territory in MappyField 365. With Territory Management, you can also view the records on a map based on the Territory. Watch this video to know how you can manage the Territory in MappyField 365. https://www.youtube.com/embed/ZNJrIi1s0TM
- [How to Set Geocode Data in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-set-geocode-data-in-mappyfield-365/) - With the Geocode feature, you can select the user account and update its address to get the Geocode data. Here is how you can set a Geocode Latitude & Longitude for a Specific Record. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Axjo_CgSbvs
- [How to Record plotting/Data Mapping working in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-record-plotting-data-mapping-working-in-mappyfield-365/) - Admins can configure the Entity to display the entity record on the map. With MappyField 365 you can easily plot the entity records in the Entity Mappings section. You just need to add the details and save it. Watch this video for more information. https://www.youtube.com/embed/MSwgcycZf4Y
- [How to Check-in / Check-out feature work in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-check-in-check-out-feature-work-in-mappyfield-365/) - With the Check-in/Check-out feature, your on-field team members can check in and check out of their daily activities like appointments, tasks as well as custom activities. This will also help you to track the exact time spent on the activity. https://www.youtube.com/embed/_Y-2Rmq9Dss
- [How to Set Mass Actions [Show Data Option] in MappyField](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-set-mass-actions-show-data-option-in-mappyfield/) - With the Mass action, you can see the list of records that are plotted on the map all in a single place. You can perform mass actions like Add Record to the Route, or assign a user to a Team. Watch this video to set Mass Actions. https://www.youtube.com/embed/a4OMoBSyFrk
- [How to Quick Actions perform in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-quick-actions-perform-in-mappyfield-365/) - There are various quick actions you can perform in MappyField 365. They are Heat map, Territory Management, MappyField 365 configuration, help, Full-Screen view. It is very easy to perform such actions. Here is a detailed video. https://www.youtube.com/embed/xKUXP1w4JBc
- [How to Use Multiple Search Options in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-use-multiple-search-options-in-mappyfield-365/) - With the Multiple Search option, you can search by region, shape, and proximity and create a category-specific view on Dynamics CRM map integration. With this advanced search, you can understand the core reasons behind the success and failures of strategies. https://www.youtube.com/embed/LVpDPaaQVfg
- [How to Use Map Templates in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-use-map-templates-in-mappyfield-365/) - With the Map templates, you can plot entity records on the map and save the Created Template in the Map. You can even share this template as a public option and share it with other users easily. Here is a detailed video. https://www.youtube.com/embed/Bv52k6JAczE
- [Check Security Templates in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/check-security-templates-in-mappyfield-365/) - Security Template lets you share only the required information with your team members securely. No need to switch back and forth between the modules to share the data. Watch this detailed video for more information. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jZekD3k5aE8
- [How to use Advanced Options feature in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-use-advanced-options-feature-in-mappyfield-365/) - Advance options come with a lot of advanced functionalities. You can plot the records on the map, route-optimization, and live user tracking. It also offers multi-language support. Watch this video to use the Advanced Options in MappyField 365. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dxWG90eZYPQ
- [How to Install, Activate, and Configure MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-install-activate-and-configure-mappyfield-365/) - AppJetty MappyField 365 plugin provides geo-analytical solutions to Dynamics Users and helps them to plot areas. Now visualize the customer data on a map and take a quick data-backed decision for your sales team. Watch this video to install MappyField 365. https://www.youtube.com/embed/jnHqKNM2kS0
- [How to Routing - Optimization & Sharing in MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-routing-optimization-sharing-in-mappyfield-365/) - MappyField is the best route planning software for Dynamic 365. You will get multiple features for complete Dynamics 365 CRM data analysis on Maps. With this feature, you can easily share the routes with your on-field team members. https://www.youtube.com/embed/b69hpzimn-k
- [How to Auto scheduling event work in Mappyfield 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-auto-scheduling-event-work-in-mappyfield-365/) - Auto scheduling is one of the features of advanced options. This allows you to schedule meetings for more than one user, setting different durations for individual meetings. Watch this video for more information. https://www.youtube.com/embed/dbYJq7RLMzc
- [How to Install and Activate Calendar Plugin](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/how-to-install-and-activate-calendar-plugin/) - Calendar 365 lets you manage your activities and tasks. It also lets you create and manage your own desired activities through custom activities. To install the Calendar 356 plugin, you should follow the steps shown in the video. https://www.youtube.com/embed/tBjZgWNXews
- [Configuring Calendar and Activities](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/configuring-calendar-and-activities/) - With Calendar 365, you can configure various activities like Task, Fax, E-mail, Phone Call, etc., to manage on the calendar. You can choose different colors to represent different activities; you can configure the view of the calendar and much more. Watch this video for more information. https://www.youtube.com/embed/uZryQCz078I
- [Perform Quick Actions from Calendar Activities](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/perform-quick-actions-from-calendar-activities/) - With Calendar 365 you can manage all your meetings, tasks, and activities of the team. You can control everything from a single screen. Here is how you can use the advanced features of Calendar 365: https://www.youtube.com/embed/zhzbiFpKOOk
- [Filter and Rescheduling Activities](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/filter-and-rescheduling-activities/) - While scheduling the activities you might have a lot of activities on your plate. With the filtering feature, you can filter the activities as per your wish. Also, it is easy to reschedule any activity by following the steps in the video. https://www.youtube.com/embed/YtqhoArapiY
- [Resource Scheduling](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/resource-scheduling/) - Resource scheduling will give you a clear idea of everyone’s working hours, break timings, etc. Now update your available, break, and leave time in Dynamics CRM using our Calendar 365. Watch this video for more information. https://www.youtube.com/embed/UuytVOqj56w
- [Create Activities](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/create-activities/) - You can add custom activities into the calendar apart from the available default activities. Whether it is to record a specific type of communication like a phone call or meetings or birthdays of your employees, you can add it all. https://www.youtube.com/embed/9EvMiW_7f70
- [Multilanguage Configuration and Functionality](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/multilanguage-configuration-and-functionality/) - Calendar 365 also offers you the Multilanguage functionality to translate as per your requirements. You can perform any operations without any ambiguity. Have a look at this video to configure the multi language functionality. https://www.youtube.com/embed/70KU2HbelzY
- [Scheduling Unscheduled Activities](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/scheduling-unscheduled-activities/) - When it comes to scheduling unscheduled activities you can do it in no time. You will get all the unscheduled activities in a single place in the list format. You just have to follow the steps shown in the video. https://www.youtube.com/embed/RXmFmxcCwVE
- [Is there Any Way Customers can See Delivery Details Once the Order is Placed?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/is-there-any-way-customers-can-see-delivery-details-once-the-order-is-placed/) - Yes, the customer can see the delivery details in the store once the order is placed. They just need to login to your store and they can see the delivery details in the My Orders or My Account section.
- [Is this Extension Compatible with all Themes and Extensions by other Vendors?](https://docs.appjetty.com/knowledgebase/is-this-extension-compatible-with-all-themes-and-extensions-by-other-vendors/) - Our Delivery date scheduler extension is completely compatible with Magento and Shopify. It is also compatible with all the default themes of Magento and Shopify.

## FAQs

- [GPL affect on my developed theme?](https://docs.appjetty.com/faqs/gpl-affect-on-my-developed-theme/) - Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipisicing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Ut enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat. Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla pariatur. Excepteur sint occaecat
- [Where do I find bind instruction](https://docs.appjetty.com/faqs/where-do-i-find-bind-instruction/) - Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipisicing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Ut enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat. Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla pariatur. Excepteur sint occaecat
- [Theme license information](https://docs.appjetty.com/faqs/theme-license-information/) - Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipisicing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Ut enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat. Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla pariatur. Excepteur sint occaecat
- [How do I post new topic](https://docs.appjetty.com/faqs/how-do-i-post-new-topic/) - Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipisicing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Ut enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat. Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla pariatur. Excepteur sint occaecat
- [How do I report a bug?](https://docs.appjetty.com/faqs/how-do-i-report-a-bug/) - Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipisicing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Ut enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat. Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla pariatur. Excepteur sint occaecat
- [Where can I find license key](https://docs.appjetty.com/faqs/where-can-i-find-license-key/) - Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipisicing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Ut enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat. Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla pariatur. Excepteur sint occaecat
- [Support hours query](https://docs.appjetty.com/faqs/support-hours-query/) - Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipisicing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Ut enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat. Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla pariatur. Excepteur sint occaecat
- [Why does wordpress only support mysql?](https://docs.appjetty.com/faqs/why-does-wordpress-only-support-mysql/) - Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipisicing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Ut enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat. Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla pariatur. Excepteur sint occaecat
- [Do I need to know coding to use wordpress?](https://docs.appjetty.com/faqs/do-i-need-to-know-coding-to-use-wordpress/) - Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipisicing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Ut enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat. Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla pariatur. Excepteur sint occaecat
- [How do I rate the theme?](https://docs.appjetty.com/faqs/how-do-i-rate-the-theme/) - Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipisicing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Ut enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat. Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla pariatur. Excepteur sint occaecat
- [How do I report a bug in a theme?](https://docs.appjetty.com/faqs/how-do-i-report-a-bug-in-a-theme/) - Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipisicing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Ut enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat. Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla pariatur. Excepteur sint occaecat
- [How do I login forum section](https://docs.appjetty.com/faqs/how-do-i-login-forum-section/) - Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipisicing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Ut enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat. Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla pariatur. Excepteur sint occaecat
- [Where do I sign up?](https://docs.appjetty.com/faqs/where-do-i-sign-up/) - Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipisicing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Ut enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat. Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla pariatur. Excepteur sint occaecat

## Topics

- [SugarCRM SURVEY ROCKET (Ultimate)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/sugarcrm-survey-rocket-ultimate-2/) - SURVEY ROCKET (Ultimate) Version: 5.5.0 SugarCRM Compatibility: Professional Edition 7.6.* to 12.2 Enterprise Edition 7.6.* to 25.2 (Sell, Serve)
- [Survey Send Failure Reports](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/view-survey-reports/survey-send-failure-reports/) - Here the report consists of a list of all the failed submissions. The grid would have Recipient Name, Recipient Module, Failed Reason and Resend. The reason for failed submission is mentioned in the Failed Reason column. Also, in order to Resend you can click on the icon displayed under the respective column. You
- [Prerequisites](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/introduction-2/prerequisites/) - Following points must be followed before starting Installation. - You should login as an Administrator in SugarCRM. - Check that your SugarCRM Instance is compatible with Survey Rocket. - You must have a valid License key. - If you are installing Survey Rocket, make sure there isn’t any older version of
- [Benefits of Survey Rocket](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/introduction-2/benefits-of-survey-rocket/) - Searching for a solution for improving customer satisfaction? Survey Rocket helps you to collect and store the valuable feedback of your customers. - Survey Rocket helps you to bridge the gap between businesses and customers. It allows you to sneak into the hearts of your customers. - Get to know the value of
- [Introduction](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/introduction-2/) - AppJetty provides an effective solution in the form of Survey Rocket – a SugarCRM based Plugin which is helpful for entrepreneurs to conduct surveys. Know your customers better by sending them a Survey questionnaire with several important questions; answer to which can affect your business strategies. Let your customers tell their preferences and give
- [About SugarCRM SURVEY ROCKET](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/sugarcrm-survey-rocket-ultimate/about-sugarcrm-survey-rocket/) - Introduction AppJetty provides an effective solution in the form of Survey Rocket – a SugarCRM based Plugin which is helpful for entrepreneurs to conduct surveys. Know your customers better by sending them a Survey questionnaire with several important questions; answer to which can affect your business strategies. Let your customers tell their preferences
- [View Survey Reports](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/view-survey-reports/) - Once a survey is sent, you can view various types of Reports based on that survey which represents the status of the survey using charts and tables. To view survey report from the list view, click on dropdown arrow besides preview icon and select Analyze Report option. After selecting the option, report gets opened
- [Send Email Using Template](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-options/send-email-using-template/) - From the Share & Assign, you can ‘Send Email’ to the selected record. By clicking on that action button, it would prompt user to select an email template. [1] The email templates list would have list of all the templates that are created within the CRM and custom templates as well. You may
- [Time Slot Duration View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-views/time-slot-duration-view/) - If you have set the “Slot Duration”, “Minimum,” & “Maximum” time slots from the default configuration of Calendar 365, the users will see the working Time slots on the Calendar page. The Time slot duration can only be seen for Days & Weeks. By setting the time slots, you can decide the availability and
- [View & Manage Activity](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-activities/view-manage-activity/) - To view detail of any activity, simply click on activity. Clicking on the activity, the detail dialog box contains all those fields and actions buttons that are enabled from the ‘Configurations’ page will appear. User can perform multiple actions like View Record, Edit the activity, & Delete the activity. By clicking on
- [Overdue Activities](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-activities/overdue-activities/) - You can configure ‘Overdue Activities’ by selecting ‘Yes’. Overdue activity on Calendar If you have selected Yes for ‘Overdue Activities’ in Backend configuration, the expired activities will be highlighted with ‘red’ alert mark.
- [Activity Action](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/activity-action/) - Clicking on any activity you will get the detail view with activity actions. You can directly complete any activity by clicking on Mark as Complete/Mark as Close and convert any activity to Opportunity/Case by clicking on ‘Convert to Opportunity’/‘Convert to Case’ respectively. Mark as Complete You can directly complete an activity from
- [Create a Custom Activity](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-activities/create-a-custom-activity/) - To create a Custom Activity, click on ‘Configuration’ icon. Click on ‘Custom Activity’ tab under ‘Activities’ section. Now click on the ‘Configure New Activity’ button to create a custom activity. Thereafter, following fields will appear under ‘Custom Activity’ tab: Select required ‘custom’ activity from the drop-down list of Entity. Read
- [Activity Details](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-management/activity-details/) - Setup for Hover Settings: To setup the Tooltip view of activity, navigate to Setup ➤ Activities, you will find the ‘Hover Settings’ under the Layout Customization. Tooltip on Calendar Hover the mouse on the activity, then the activity details can be seen in tooltip view. Pop-up Settings: To setup the
- [Dynamics CRM- Calendar 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-version-comp/) - Dynamics CRM- Calendar 365 Version: 7.0 Compatibility: Microsoft Dynamics 365 (Online and On-premise) Browser Compatibility: Edge (v12) and above, Firefox (v29) and above, Chrome (v33) and above, Safari (v7.1) and above, Opera (v20) and above
- [Additional Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-default-configuration/additional-settings/) - - You can configure the additional settings related to the activities as below: - Team: By enabling the “Team”, you can display the “Team” resources of the default CRM under the ‘Resource’ tab of the Resource Calendar. - Business Unit: By enabling the “Business Unit”, you can display the “Business Unit” resources of
- [Calendar Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-default-configuration/views-configuration/) - You can set up the calendar options and set default values for the activities. You can configure the following settings: - Calendar Representation: You can set any of the Default representation of the calendar from the following: Gantt View > Top Down View > Timeline View > Agenda View - Time Scale Representation:
- [Calendar 365 Default Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-default-configuration/) - To configure the Calendar 365 settings, click on the ‘Gear’ icon available on the Calendar main page. By clicking on the ‘settings’ icon, you will navigate to the Calendar 365 settings to manage the calendar view and activities to be displayed on the calendar. You will get three main tabs: Profile, Setup, and
- [User wise Calendar 365 Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-default-configuration/user-wise-calendar-365-configuration/) - When any role is assigned to the CRM users like AppJetty Calendar 365/AppJetty Calendar 365 Administrator or System Administrator role, you can configure the Calendar 365 users’ role details and accessibility. To manage and configure the user-specific role, click on the User Calendar Configuration from the Calendar 365 navigation panel (left panel). By
- [Advanced](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-default-configuration/advanced/) - After configuring the Settings of the Entity Calendar, you can configure the Advanced configuration of the Entity Calendar. Under this section, you can configure the CRM Entities to display on the calendar of Calendar 365. You need to configure the attributes and details of the entity to display on the calendar. If the
- [Entity Calendar](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-default-configuration/entity-calendar/) - You will have the Entity Calendar to get the entity-specific activity records in the calendar. Structure Configuration Configure the default view of the Entity calendar under the ‘Views’ section. By configuring the individual setups/options, you can define the view of the Entity Calendar. You can configure the following settings: - Calendar Representation:
- [Activities](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-default-configuration/activities/) - It will include tabs for Task, Fax, Phone Call, Email, Letter, Appointment, Recurring Appointment, Service Activity, Campaign Activity, Bookable Resource Booking and Custom Activity. You can configure all the activities individually. Each of the activity tab will contain following fields: - Enable: You can enable the activity to display any activity in the
- [Owner's Color Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-default-configuration/owners-color-configuration/) - To define the color of the activities based on owner that is CRM users. By enabling this option, you can differentiate the user wise activities in different color on the calendar. By ‘selecting’ the Owner Active checkbox, you will navigate to the Owner’s color Configuration. -You will get the list of the CRM
- [Locations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-default-configuration/locations-2/) - Keep the location feature active and insert the Google Autocomplete API key. After configuring the “Locations”, click on the Save button to apply the changes to the activity calendars. If enabled, you need to enter Google Autocomplete API key that you have in order to get location suggestions. Note: To generate the
- [Holidays](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-default-configuration/holidays-2/) - To manage the holidays, click on the ‘Holidays’ section and configure the following details: - Display Holidays: Enable this option to display the holidays. - Appearance Customization: Set the color to be displayed for the Holiday in the calendar using the color picker tool. - Google Calendar API Key: Insert the
- [Auto-Refresh](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-default-configuration/auto-refresh/) - You can now set up your map to Auto Refresh, without refreshing it manually. Navigate to the Auto Refresh section and configure the following details. - Auto Refresh: Enable this option to refresh the resource and customer calendars. - Set a Duration: Set the number of minutes you want to auto refresh the
- [Notification](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-default-configuration/notification/) - - Enable Notification Reminder: You will get the notification reminder about upcoming activity when you are on the Calendar page. - Receive Notification for the appointment: Set the minutes to be notified just before starting the activity. - Enable Desktop Notification: You will get the notification reminder about upcoming activity as Desktop Notifications.
- [Resource Scheduling](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-default-configuration/resource-scheduling-2/) - - Resource View: Enable this “Resource View” option to enable the Resource Scheduling option in the calendar. Personalization After enabling the Resource Scheduling feature, select the colors for the different activities like Available, On Break, Approved Leave, Rejected Leave, and Pending Leave. Timeslot Configuration You can also set the
- [Free Trial and Activation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-installation-conf/free-trial-and-activation/) - Click on ‘Calendar 365’ display name to configure the plugin with your license key. This will open a new window. Click on ‘Configuration’ from the options provided on the left side panel of the page. You can purchase the licensed version any time. To purchase the license, click on ‘Buy Now’ button. Your
- [Installation Steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-installation-conf/installation-steps/) - To install the “Calendar 365” plugin, the following steps are to be followed On purchasing the plugin, you will get a zip file named Calendar365_v7.0.zip Login into your CRM Account and click on Settings -> Solutions. Click on ‘Import’ to upload and install the Solution. Click on Choose File button and choose
- [About Dynamics Calendar 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-version-comp/dynamics-calendar-365-about/) - Introduction Calendar 365 from AppJetty is a calendar solution for Dynamics CRM. This solution by AppJetty helps you to manage your activities. It also lets you create and manage your own desired activities through Custom Activities. With this plugin Admin User can manage the activities and the tasks in two different calendars namely
- [Check Booking Appointment](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/appointment-booking/check-booking-appointment/) - Once your customers book the appointments, you can view them in your calendar. By hovering on it, you can view the basic details of the appointment as per the configuration. By clicking on the appointment, you can view its details and you will have an option to Reschedule, Re-assign, and Cancel the appointment.
- [Appointment Booking](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/appointment-booking/) - Your customer can book the appointment from here, which will be directly visible on the Dynamics calendar. Your customer has to select the date & time of appointment and click on the Book Appointment button. After clicking the button, fill in the following details: - First Name & Last Name: Insert the
- [Sugar BPM Support](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/sugar-bpm-support/) - How it works: -Surveys can now also be sent via Sugar BPM using the Survey Rocket plugin. -You have to create a Process Definition and Design its flow. -Define the Start event and then provide action to send surveys. -To send surveys, you just need to Create a Related “Survey Transaction”
- [SugarCRM SURVEY ROCKET (Ultimate)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/sugarcrm-survey-rocket-ultimate/) - SURVEY ROCKET (Ultimate) Version: 5.2.4 SugarCRM Compatibility: Professional Edition 7.6.* to 12.0 Enterprise Edition 7.6.* to 12.0 (Sell, Serve)
- [Crosstab Reports](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/view-survey-reports/crosstab-reports/) - You can create a Crosstab Report to check the percentage of two different Question of the Survey. To create new Crosstab Report, click on ‘create’ + icon (top-right side). By clicking on it, a pop-up box will open where you need to add details like Crosstab Report Name, select question for row axis,
- [Survey Dashboard Support](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-dashboard-support/) - You can create dashboard having survey functionalities like question wise report, response report, send status report, survey status report, etc. Survey Question report: By creating this dashlet, you will be able to view question report for that particular question. Survey Response Report: By creating this dashlet, you can view response report for that
- [Global Filters](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/global-filters/) - You can also filter responses as needed by applying global filters to the gathered data. There are two different global filters available: Filter By Date and Filter By Question Logic. Global Filters are available and get applied to question wise report and individual report. Filter By Date: To filter data based on date,
- [Export Reports](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/export-reports/) - You can also export reports as required by clicking on Export button available on the top right section in survey reports. All available reports like status report, question wise report along with their different types like combined, email or open ended can be exported by clicking on Export button. Clicking on Export option,
- [Poll within Survey Module](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/poll-within-survey-module/) - To create a Poll from select ‘Create Poll’ option from the Survey Module dropdown. This will open up a page to create Poll. Fill in all the necessary information. You can upload a logo and select a theme that suits your requirement. A Poll will have only one question which can either be
- [Contact Us](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/contact-us-7/) - We simplify your business, offer unique business solution in digital web and IT landscapes. Live Chat Get instant support with our Live Chat. Visit our product page at: https://www.appjetty.com/sugarcrm-survey-rocket.htm and click on the Live Chat button for instant support. Tickets Raise tickets for your specific question! Send an
- [View Poll Reports](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/poll-within-survey-module/view-poll-reports/) - Once a Poll is sent, you can view various types of Reports based on that Poll which represents the status of the Poll using charts and tables. Poll reports can be viewed by selecting the Analyse Report option from the list view or the detail view of the Surveys module. To view poll
- [Other Options of Survey](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/other-options-of-survey/)
- [Generate Shareable Link](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/other-options-of-survey/generate-shareable-link/) - For sending out surveys to people other than the existing CRM records or to send surveys using a web-link, use the shareable web link feature. To generate a shareable link, navigate to Detail view of that survey and click on ‘Get Shareable Link’ button. This will generate a shareable web link, which you
- [Survey Preview Icon](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/other-options-of-survey/survey-preview-icon/) - You can preview the survey that you have created before sending it. Survey can be previewed by selecting Preview option available on the list view and in the detail view of the particular survey. In the list view of surveys, click on Preview icon available in the list besides every survey created. In
- [Exporting a Survey Form](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/other-options-of-survey/exporting-a-survey-form/) - To export the Survey Form in PDF or DOC format, click on ‘Export as PDF’ or ‘Export as Doc’ option from the actions drop down besides Edit button. This will export the survey form as it is into a PFD or DOC file.
- [Copying a Survey](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/other-options-of-survey/copying-a-survey/) - Once a survey is sent or shareable link is generated. i.e. Survey is published and filled by respondent, that survey cannot be edited again. So if you want to use same Questions Type and Advance Options, copy that Survey and edit as per new Survey. Copy option is provided from the action dropdown
- [Take Survey](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/take-survey/) - You can take survey on behalf of the customer. Take survey option will be available for modules like accounts, contacts, leads and targets. To take survey, Go to Detail page of any supported Module ->Take Survey. It will open a pop up with the list of surveys. From there, you can select any
- [Survey Automation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-automation/) - Send surveys automatically through survey automation module. Create a workflow from survey automation module to send surveys based on certain conditions that you set. Set actions to determine to whom the survey should be sent to. Navigate to Admin Panel and click on ‘Survey Automation’ link. Now click on ‘Create’ button to create
- [Custom SMTP Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/custom-smtp-configuration/) - Use custom SMTP to send survey invitations through your own SMTP email account. This will increase the deliverability of your survey invitations by avoiding spam issues, email bounces and IP Blocks. To configure SMTP for sending surveys, navigate to Admin Panel and click on ‘Survey Rocket SMTP Setting’ link. Enter the necessary details
- [Create Template for Email & SMS/WhatsApp](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/create-template-for-email-sms-whatsapp/)
- [Email Template](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/create-template-for-email-sms-whatsapp/email-template/) - To create an email template, click on Manage Email Template option from the ‘survey’ detail page. If the Template is not created yet or this survey is not selected in any template, a ‘warning message’ will pop up to create a template for Email. Note: If this survey is already selected in
- [SMS/WhatsApp Module](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/create-template-for-email-sms-whatsapp/sms-whatsapp-module/)
- [SMS/WhatsApp Setting](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/create-template-for-email-sms-whatsapp/sms-whatsapp-module/sms-whatsapp-setting/) - First, you must setup the SMS/WhatsApp module from the Survey Rocket in Administration section. Administration -> Survey Rocket -> SMS/WhatsApp Setting. By clicking on SMS/WhatsApp Setting option, you will redirect to the SMS/WhatsApp Settings page where you can configure the SMS & WhatsApp settings using Twilio cloud communication platform. Here you must register
- [SMS/WhatsApp Template](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/create-template-for-email-sms-whatsapp/sms-whatsapp-module/sms-whatsapp-template/) - To create a SMS/WhatsApp template, click on Manage SMS/WhatsApp Template option from the survey detail page. If the Template is not created yet or this survey is not selected in any template, the ‘warning message‘ will pop up to create a template for SMS/WhatsApp. Note: If this survey is already selected in
- [Sending Survey & Survey Summary](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/sending-survey-survey-summary/)
- [Survey Summary](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/sending-survey-survey-summary/survey-summary/) - Once the survey is sent, a pop-up will appear displaying the Summary of survey. Email: SMS/WhatsApp:
- [Send Survey](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/sending-survey-survey-summary/send-survey/) - Navigate to a module from which you wish to send Survey and select the list of persons to whom the survey should be sent via Email or WhatsApp/SMS modules. Now, select the contacts to send the Survey. Click on the drop-down arrow and click on Send Survey option from the menu. A ‘Warning
- [Survey Transactions](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-transactions/) - View all the survey transactions at one place. You can check the submitted survey details from Survey Transactions option Survey Transactions displays the list of all surveys sent along with their mail delivery status, score details and module related parameters. You can also filter out the transactions based on different filtering criteria.
- [Survey Submission Sub-Panel](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-transactions/survey-submission-sub-panel/) - You can also view the details of survey transactions for individual records from the ‘Survey Submissions’ sub-panel in the detail view of the respective modules.
- [Status Report](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/view-survey-reports/status-report/) - Status Report displays 6 different tabs of reports: -> Combined -> Email -> Weblink -> Manual -> SMS -> WhatsApp Combined ‘Combined Report’ has a Normal and Trend Report for user to select from. By default, normal report is shown. ‘Normal report’ has a pie-chart depicting the percentage of users who
- [Question wise Report](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/view-survey-reports/question-wise-report/) - ‘Question wise’ report displays question Summary Report that shows list of responses for each question. Like ‘Status Report’, Question wise Report displays 6 different tabs of reports: -> Combined -> Email -> Weblink -> Manual -> SMS -> WhatsApp Under Normal tab to view chart which shows the ‘percentage of the submitted data’.
- [Individual Report](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/view-survey-reports/individual-report/) - Individual Report displays the list of records to whom the survey was send. It displays the type of Module, Status (submitted or not viewed); Survey Send Date and Survey Submission Date. A resend option is also available to resend the survey to a respondent. You can sort the list according to modules or
- [Comparison Report](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/view-survey-reports/comparison-report/) - You can Create a Comparison Report to compare the common question types from two surveys. You can create a new Comparison Report by clicking on ‘create’ + icon. While selecting questions from different surveys, make sure both have same question type. The same applies with number of options in both the questions
- [Advanced Options](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-a-survey/creating-survey-template/advanced-options/) - Advanced Options includes question validations. You can add Help tips for each Survey Question. Help Tips are text you can set to guide respondents during the survey. For example, if you think you may need to clarify a term used in a question, you can use a tip to clarify the term. If
- [Creating a New Survey Form](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/creating-a-new-survey-form/) - You can ‘Create Survey’ from the Template list if you want to use any template or you can ‘Create Survey’ directly from the Surveys page as well. You will find the following pages to create a Survey From: -> Detail Page -> Survey Welcome page -> Survey Pages -> Survey Thank You Page
- [Survey Details page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/creating-a-new-survey-form/survey-details-page/) - Insert all the necessary details for the Survey Form. Survey Title will be copied from the Template if you are creating a Survey from the Template else insert it as per you Survey subject. Upload a logo and can set background image if any. Insert the duration of the Survey, when you
- [Survey Welcome Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/creating-a-new-survey-form/survey-welcome-page/) - You can add a survey welcome page to give a brief introduction of your survey before the respondent starts it. You will get the default description, but you can customize the welcome page as per your Survey using the inbuilt Tiny MCE Editor.
- [Survey Pages options](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/creating-a-new-survey-form/survey-pages-options/)
- [Add/Edit Questions](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/creating-a-new-survey-form/survey-pages-options/add-edit-questions/) - You will get the pre-defined Survey Pages if you are creating the Survey from the Template else you need to insert the details of Survey pages. You can edit the inserted Survey Pages as per your requirement and you can insert other Questions from the Page Component by drag & drop feature to the
- [Select Theme](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/creating-a-new-survey-form/survey-pages-options/select-theme/) - You can also choose an attractive theme that suits your survey page from the “Theme” page. You can also select theme to change the look and feel of the survey when you preview the Survey.
- [Enable Scoring option](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/creating-a-new-survey-form/survey-pages-options/enable-scoring-option/) - Scoring feature can be enabled for 4 types of questions: -> Checkbox -> Dropdown list -> Radio Button -> Multi Select List -> Boolean To enable scoring while creating survey, tick the Enable Scoring checkbox. This will enable boxes to enter scores besides the answer choices. Once the respondent fills in
- [Other option Textbox](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/creating-a-new-survey-form/survey-pages-options/other-option-textbox/) - To allow respondents to give some other answer than those mentioned in the options, the ‘Other’ option feature can be used. This option can be enabled when you have selected the Multi-choice Question type: -> Checkbox -> Dropdown list -> Radio Button -> Multi Select List Tick the Add other option textbox
- [Show Image option](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/creating-a-new-survey-form/survey-pages-options/show-image-option/) - Radio Button and Check Box question type can have ‘images’ as their options. You can show the image icons in the options. For that tick the Show Image Option checkbox. Using this option, you can provide the selection to the customer about Social Media or another selection based on the image or icons.
- [Attachment Question Type](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/creating-a-new-survey-form/survey-pages-options/attachment-question-type/) - After drag & drop the ‘Attachment Question’ type, you can give the option to attach any file from the Survey Page. Under “Advanced Option” available within Attachment Question Type, user can restrict file upload size and file extensions for particular file upload. Upload size can range between 1 MB – 5 MB. Supported
- [Changing Question Type](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/creating-a-new-survey-form/survey-pages-options/changing-question-type/) - To change the ‘Question’ Type for an already added question in the Survey Page, click on ‘edit’ icon. The dropdown list of all Question Types will be opened. Select a question type from the list and the existing type will be converted into the selected one.
- [Add Section Header](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/creating-a-new-survey-form/survey-pages-options/add-section-header/) - To add a ‘section header’ inside a Survey Page, click on the ‘Section Header’ icon on the top right corner of a question. This will add a ‘Section Header’ above that question. By doing so you can categorize questions into different sections in a single page. Survey Page View (Front End View)
- [Question Position](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/creating-a-new-survey-form/survey-pages-options/question-position/) - You can change the position of any ‘Question’ by holding the Question and drag up-down to change the position.
- [Survey Preview](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/creating-a-new-survey-form/survey-pages-options/survey-preview/) - You can check your Survey once it is created. To check the ‘Survey Preview’, navigate to the list of the Surveys and by clicking on ‘view’ icon.
- [Survey Thank You Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/creating-a-new-survey-form/survey-thank-you-page/) - You can add a Thank you page at the end of a survey. You can customize the Thank you page as per your requirements using the inbuilt Tiny MCE Editor.
- [Advance Survey Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/creating-a-new-survey-form/advance-survey-configuration/) - If you want to redirect the responder to any webpage after submission of Survey, insert the Redirect URL. To allow the submission of Survey more than one time, insert the no. of Resubmit Count. ‘Tick’ the Enable Progress bar indicator option to display the progress of pages with number on Survey page on
- [Data Piping](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/data-piping/) - Data Piping allows you to pre-fill your survey form with the existing CRM data. At the same time, you can also update your CRM records using your survey responses. To enable Data Piping for your survey, check the ‘Enable Data Piping’ check box. Now select a module from the following: Accounts, Contacts Leads
- [Applying Skip Logic](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/applying-skip-logic/) - Skip Logic feature allows you to customize your survey for each respondent by applying logic to the answer choices. Based on a respondent’s answer, branching logic will be created as per the conditions defined by you. Skip Logic sample: To apply Skip Logic, you must create the Survey and save it. Once you
- [Survey Page View (Front End View)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/applying-skip-logic/survey-page-view-front-end-view/) - By selecting No, hidden question will be shown.
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation-activation-sugarcrm/installation/) - To start with the installation, Log-in as Administrator into SugarCRM. Go to the Administration page and click on ‘Module Loader’ to install the package. Browse the zip file and click on ‘Upload’ button under Module Loader screen. After uploading package, click on the ‘Install’ button to install the package. Click on ‘Commit’ button
- [Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation-activation-sugarcrm/configuration/)
- [Get Activation Key](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation-activation-sugarcrm/get-activation-key/) - Get the activation key from the Order Confirmation Mail. OR Login to your AppJetty account then go to downloadable options and copy the activation key for the Survey Rocket plug-in.
- [Activate Your Plugin](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation-activation-sugarcrm/get-activation-key/activate-your-plugin/) - After successful package installation, you need to validate your license and activate your Survey Rocket from Survey Rocket Configuration panel. Log-in to your SugarCRM as admin and go to Administrator Page. You can see the ‘Survey Rocket’ section on this page. Now, click on ‘License Configuration’ link, this will re-direct you to License
- [Create a Survey](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-a-survey/) - How to Create a Survey? After getting the activation key and plugin, you will get the Survey options in SugarCRM menu. User can design a new ‘Survey Form’ in three ways: Edit & redesign an existed “Survey Template” and use it to create multiple surveys. Build a “New Survey” from Scratch. (Template
- [Creating Survey Template](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-a-survey/creating-survey-template/) - You can create a ‘Template’ from Survey Templates -> Create Survey Template or by clicking on Create button from the “Survey Templates” page. If the template is already created as per your requirement, you can directly Create a Survey.
- [Adding Questions on the Survey Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-a-survey/creating-survey-template/adding-questions-on-the-survey-page/) - The first step to building your survey template is adding questions. You can edit questions if the template is already created. “Survey Rocket” provides various Question Types with Advance Option to create ‘Survey Form’ with pagination. Title: Add a title for Survey Template. It will be based on the subject you are creating
- [Insert Question details](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-a-survey/creating-survey-template/insert-question-details/) - Insert the Questions you want to base your survey on. Here we have inserted the Radio Button component. So, you can add the options based on the questions.
- [Installation & Activation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation-activation-sugarcrm/) - You will see how to install and activate the "Survey Rocket" into the SugarCRM.
- [Deep Linking (Product Sharing)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/deep-linking-product-sharing/) - Sometimes Web links don’t work with native mobile apps. So, the ‘Deep Linking’ comes into the picture. Deep Links allows the mobile app to push to a specific page within an app versus simply opening it. [1] If two users have the MageMob App Builder application installed on their phone and they want to
- [Abandoned Cart](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/abandoned-cart/) - The users would get the notification of the Abandoned Cart if they missed the checkout of their shopping. The notification will be displayed as configured from the Magento admin side (Manage Abandoned Cart Notification). If multiple products are in the cart, the users will get abandoned cart notifications for the multiple products if you
- [Address Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/user-profile/address-page/) - Users can add the address to ship the order by clicking on the add button in the top right corner. Here you need to define address details like street, city, postal code, etc. Users can also manage addresses by editing or removing saved addresses. Users can also find the address which they want to
- [Wishlist Screen](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/user-profile/wishlist-screen/) - Users can manage Wishlist by adding & removing the products. The product is added to the Wishlist from the Product listing page or from the Product details page by clicking on the Wishlist icon. You can add to the cart by clicking on the Cart icon. To clear the whole Wishlist, tap on
- [User Profile](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/user-profile/) - If user is logged in, the options related to User Profile will be displayed: > Wish List > Orders > Addresses. By tapping on ‘edit’ icon, User Profile page will be redirected. User can check own profile and update the details by tapping ‘edit’ button. By tapping on key button,
- [Product Review Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/orders/product-review-page/) - Here, you can see the list of reviews given by different customers for the product. It can also be filtered by Positive and Negative options. Write Review page will appear after the completion of an order. Users can share reviews about the purchased product by adding reviews for the product and giving ratings for
- [Track Order Listing Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/orders/track-order-listing-page/) - Logged in user can track the order by tapping on Orders in the Category slider. By tapping on Orders, users get a list of all placed orders with order status and tracking information. By tapping on any order, it will show details about delivery and other information. The Track Order button will appear if
- [Order Confirmation Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/orders/order-confirmation-page/) - It gives confirmation for placing an order successfully and provides an Order ID number to track the order at the time of delivery. It also provides buttons to continue your shopping and view orders which display ordered details. By tapping on the View Order button, they will be redirected to the Order Details page.
- [Orders](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/orders/) - Once the users placed the order from the app, they will get the confirmation of the order. The users can also check the placed orders by navigating the order detail pages.
- [Offline Sync (Products in Cart)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/offline-sync-products-in-cart/) - The users can also add the product to the cart even if they don’t have an internet connection. They can add the products to the cart in offline mode. Once they are connected to the internet, they will get the Sync Cart confirmation in the popup. If the users want to sync the products
- [Offers tab](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/offers-tab/) - If you have added and configured the offer banners from the Magento admin side (Manage Offers) and selected the Offers from the “Bottom Navigation Modules” (Store-level), the users can access the Offers tab from the mobile app. (Left image) When the users press on the “Offers” tab, they will be redirected to the offers
- [Countdown Timer Banner](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/countdown-timer-banner/) - If you have configured the Countdown Timer Banner from the Manage Home Page Layout (Magento admin side), the users will see the discounts/offers in the countdown timer banner. For the countdown timer banner, you can configure the banner background, timer text color, and overall appearances by managing the countdown timer banner from the Magento
- [Product Checkout Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/product-checkout-page/) - Users can Check out shopping from the cart or directly tap the Buy Now button from the product details page. Note: If the shipping address is not added yet or if you are a guest user, users will be redirected to Add New Address page. After saving the Address, users will redirect to the
- [Product Detail Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/product-page/product-detail-page/) - The product detail page of any product displays the product details with basic details like Product Name, Price, Ratings, Size, Color, and details with options “Add to Cart” and “Buy Now”. As you ‘tap’ on the product from the listing page, it will redirect to the product details page in which the user can
- [Product Listing Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/product-page/product-listing-page/) - The product listing page of any category displays the product details with basic details like Product Name, Price, Ratings, Wishlist, and Cart. It can also sort by price low to high, high to low, and filtered with different options like category, color, size, etc. by tapping on the ‘Filter’ icon. Users can view
- [App Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magento-backend-configuration/app-settings/) - Users can manage various settings for the Magneto 2 store mobile application by clicking on Settings. From the Settings page, the user can manage the following things: (Left screenshot) Notifications: They can Enable/Disable the notification preferences based on which notification they want to get. Note: Enable/Disable the notification appearance only available in
- [Select Currency](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/preferences/select-currency/) - Under the Preferences, the User can see the Currency option with the already selected Currency. Users can change the currency by tapping on the Currency option and selecting another Currency. Users will get the list of the Currency as per the backend configuration and by tapping any currency, the Currency will be selected.
- [Select Store](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/preferences/select-store/) - Under the Preferences, User can see the Store option with the name of the selected Store. Users can change the Store by tapping on the Store option and selecting another Store. User will get the list of the Stores as per the backend configuration and by tapping any Store, the Store will be selected.
- [Select Website](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/preferences/select-website/) - Under the Preferences, the users can see the Website option with the selected Website. Users can change the Website by tapping on the Website option and selecting another website. User will get the list of the Websites as per the backend configuration and tap on the website which he/she wants. Note: If you have
- [Shopping Cart](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/dashboard-screen-home-page/shopping-cart/) - By clicking on the Cart icon, users can manage the items which they have added to the cart. User can manage the quantity of product, proceed to checkout by tapping on Checkout button and remove product from the cart by tapping on Remove button. Note: By adding product into Wishlist it will remove
- [Notification](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/dashboard-screen-home-page/notification/) - By clicking on notification icon, user can check the notification related to orders and its status. Notifications can be removed by pressing Clear All. In this page, some notification tabs are highlighted with blue color, it shows that notifications are unread, others are already read by user. By swiping left it will
- [Home Page: Search Product](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/dashboard-screen-home-page/home-page-search-product/) - User can search the Product by pressing search icon. Users will get the last searched 5-products in the dropdown list under the Search product text box. Users can search for any product by inserting the name, caption, or SKU of the product. Users can search any product using Barcode Scanner which is
- [Magento Home icon](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/dashboard-screen-home-page/magento-home-icon/) - By tapping on this icon, the user will redirect to the home page (Dashboard) from any page in the app with the latest updates.
- [Category](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/dashboard-screen-home-page/category/) - If you have selected the Category to display in the bottom navigation from the MageMob App Builder Configuration (Magento admin side), the users will see the Categories tab in the bottom navigation. By pressing the ‘Categories’ tab from the bottom navigation, the users will see the categories in the nested format as configured from
- [Dashboard Screen (Home Page)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/dashboard-screen-home-page/) - After configuring the layouts in Manage Home Page Layout from Magento backend, the dashboard screen will be displayed as per the configured sequence. On the header, there are mainly navigation points in the menu: > Category Menu > Search Product > HOME icon > Notification icon > Cart
- [Category Menu](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/dashboard-screen-home-page/category-menu/) - By clicking on icon, the drawer will slide from the left. The menu drawer consists of the Product Categories and their subcategories that are configured from the backend. The header of the drawer menu contains the details of User profile. For the Logged in users, it provides modules like Wish List, Orders &
- [Login and Registration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/login-and-registration/) - MageMob Mobile App Builder allows users to log in with a registered email id and passwords. Another way to log in with social media accounts like Facebook or Google. On that page, the user needs to enter the email id and password of the existing social media account. Skip: It also allows users
- [Extension Activation & Other Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magento-backend-configuration/extension-activation-other-configuration/) - By clicking on Manage Configuration, you can activate the extension, set general configuration, and insert the Notification key for Android/iOS users. Copy an activation key Copy the activation key from the Order Confirmation Mail. OR Log into your account at www.appjetty.com using the email and password you have provided at the
- [M2_MageMob App Builder](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magemob-app-builder-2/) - Version: 1.1.0 Compatibility: Magento Enterprise Edition: 2.2.* to 2.4.* Magento Community Edition: 2.0.* to 2.4.* Device Compatibility: Android: 5 Lollipop and above iOS: iOS 12.0 and above
- [Create Entity Records](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/create-entity-records/) - To create records, navigate to the Entity Calendar and click on the date on the calendar that you want to add the record to. As you click on the date, a “Create Record” popup will appear on your screen. You need to select the required record from the list. You will get the
- [User Leaves](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/resource-scheduler-manage-working-hours/user-leaves/) - You will get the Leave requests of your team members (CRM users). From the Calendar header, you will find the leave icon. You will get the popup named “User Leaves” with the leave requests of your team members (CRM users). You can Approve/Reject the leaves as per your requirement. When you approve,
- [Resource Scheduler (Manage Working Hours)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/resource-scheduler-manage-working-hours/) - In the Calendar365, you can enable the “Resource Scheduler” from the settings and you can schedule the activity based on the added working hours. If the “Default (User Working Hours)” option is selected, User only can view the working hours on the AppJetty Calendar view based on the default CRM user option. But
- [Follow Up Appointment](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-management/follow-up-appointment/) - You can create follow-up meetings when you want to discuss recurring topics or previous meeting topics that were not closed in an earlier meeting. There are two ways you can create follow-up appointments - All Appointments, and Inside Appointments. All Appointments Once you click on the Follow Up Icon, you will get
- [Entity Calendar](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-management/entity-calendar/) - By clicking on the “Entity Calendar”, you will check the entity records on the calendar as you have configured under the “Entity calendar” from the Calendar setup. From the left navigation, by clicking on the “Entity Calendar” dropdown, you will get the list of Entities that you have configured. Once you select the
- [Resource Calendar](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-management/resources/) - The calendar is separated in two: Resources Calendar and Customer Calendar. To view the navigate to ‘Resources’ section on the left-hand side of the calendar Resource Calendar: “User/Teams”, “Resource Booking” and “Facilities/Equipment” resources can be found in Resource Calendar. If User/Teams option is selected as resource, it displays list of users in
- [Assign User Role](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-default-configuration/assign-user-role/) - To manage the user roles, navigate to Settings -> Security -> Users. You will get the list of the users (CRM Users). Now, select the users whose roles are to be managed and click on the MANAGE ROLES option. This will open a pop-up to select roles. To access AppJetty product entities, assign
- [Configure Languages](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-default-configuration/configure-languages/) - You can also configure language of your choice by clicking on Configure Languages button available on Configurations page. On configure language page, select the language from dropdown that you wish to configure messages for. Here, user needs to add translations themselves for the messages in the language of their choice. Click on
- [Save Calendar View for Entity Calendar](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/save-and-share-calendar-views/save-calendar-view-for-entity-calendar/) - Similarly, you can save the Entity Calendar. By clicking on the ‘Save’ icon, you will get the popup to insert the calendar name. You can decide whether you want to share with others or keep it private only for your use. Click on the Save button to save the Entity Calendar. You will get
- [Left Side Panel Options](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-management/left-side-panel-options/) - Activities - To manage the activities which are to be displayed in the calendar, navigate to ‘Activities’ section on the left-hand side of the calendar. - Thereafter, check the checkbox besides the activity to display the particular activity in the calendar. Here it will show only those activities that are enabled from the
- [Quick Create Activity (CRM Form)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-activities/create-an-activity/quick-create-activity-crm-form/) - If you have enabled the Quick Create Form option from “Calendar Configuration > Advance Settings”, you will get the CRM backend view (CRM Form view) to create the activity. You will get a drop-down list of the activities that are enabled. Select the activity and click on the CREATE After clicking on the
- [About Dynamics MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365/about-dynamics-mappyfield-365/) - Introduction AppJetty MappyField 365 plugin provides geo-analytical solutions to Dynamics 365 CRM users and helps them to plot CRM data in maps. Prerequisites The following requirement must be followed before starting the Plugin installation: - You should be logged in to Dynamics CRM 2016 or Dynamics 365, Online or On-premises. -
- [Custom Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/custom-dashboard/) - You can configure the custom dashboard as per your requirement by selecting the entity and its relevant records. For that navigate to the Dashboard Configuration from the MappyField left side navigation pane. [1] From the Dashboard Configuration, you can create a new customize dashboard as per your requirement, for that click on the
- [Analytical Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/analytical-dashboard/) - The dashboards are provided in the left navigation panel from the MappyField 365. There are six different MappyField 365 dashboards: > Overview Dashboard > Sales Activity Dashboard > Sales Performance Dashboard > Service Activity Dashboard > Reporting Dashboard > Custom Dashboard
- [Rejected Check Ins and Check Outs](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/check-ins-check-outs/rejected-check-ins-and-check-outs/) - Any rejected Check-ins and check-outs will be displayed under Rejected Check-Ins and Rejected Check-Outs view respectively. [1] The users won't be able to check in or check out if the admin has rejected their request. [2]
- [Approved Check Outs](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/check-ins-check-outs/approved-check-outs/) - Once the Check-outs are approved it will be displayed in the Approved Check-outs page.
- [Approve Check Out](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/check-ins-check-outs/approve-check-out/) - Admin can approve these late check-outs by navigating to Check-Ins - Check-Out section. From the drop-down list select the Pending Check-Outs and you will get the list of all the pending check outs. [1] To approve individually click on the particular check out and roll down to Check Out Status. Select Approve or reject
- [Check Outs](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/check-ins-check-outs/check-outs/) - Once you have successfully checked in or approved check in, Check out button will be visible in the Info card of the activity. [1] Click on the Check out button and Fill the following list of details in case of late check out: [2] Reason for late checkout: Enter the reason for late
- [Approved Check Ins](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/check-ins-check-outs/approved-check-ins/) - Once the Check-ins are approved it will be displayed in the Approved Check-Ins page.
- [Approve Check Ins](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/check-ins-check-outs/approve-check-ins/) - Admins can approve these late check-ins by navigating to Check-Ins - Check-Out section. From the drop-down list select the Pending Check-Ins and you will get the list of all the pending check ins. [1] There are two ways to approve the check-ins, either you can do it individually or bulk. To approve individually
- [Check-Ins/Check-Outs](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/check-ins-check-outs/) - You can use check-in and check-out features in all activity entities. Check-In feature enables admin/user to keep track of exact time spent behind an activity. With the help of check in/check out button, you can tag geo-coordinates of the location and time while starting and completing an activity. To perform check in,
- [Send Email Using Template](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/data-grid/send-email-using-template/) - Send Email by selecting the records. As you click on Email icon, the Send Email popup window will open. You need to select the Email Template. By selecting an email template, you can send the Email on the email ids of the selected records. By clicking on Send Email button the email
- [Add Task & Appointment](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/data-grid/add-task-appointment/) - You can add the Task of selected records by clicking on Add Task icon. As you click on that icon, the Add Task popup window will open to insert the Task-related details. [1] After clicking on Create button, Task will be added. Similarly, you can add the ‘Appointment’ of selected records by
- [Assign to User/Team](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/data-grid/assign-to-user-team/) - You can directly assign the selected record to the User/Team. As you click on that icon, the Assign to User or Team popup window will open to select the User/Team. [1] After selecting User/Teams, click on Assign button. [2]
- [Add Record to Record](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/data-grid/add-record-to-record/) - Select the records and click on the “Add Record to Route” icon to add the records to the route. By clicking on that icon, the ‘Routes’ tab will appear with the selected records of the data grid. [1] The locations will be added based on the record selection in Data Grid. [2]
- [Data Grid](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/data-grid/) - Data Grid provides listing of records which are plotted on the map. You can perform different actions and manage the records from the Data Grid. To view the plotted records in the data grid, click on Show Data. [1] By clicking on Show Data, a slider will open. You can view the plotted
- [Refresh](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/advance-options/refresh/) - By clicking on the Refresh icon, the MappyField map and plotted records will refresh and load again.
- [Summary Card](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/advance-options/summary-card/) - Clicking on ‘Open Summary Card’ icon, you can view total number of records and other entity related details plotted on map as configured from the back end.
- [Save Template](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/advance-options/save-template/) - All the plotting data made along with zoom level configurations can be saved as a Template. By clicking on Save icon, a dialog box opens to give a name to the template. Moreover, you can select the box Is Public to make the template public. To save the existing template, click on the Update
- [Advance Options](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/advance-options/)
- [Templates](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/templates/) - Templates feature helps you save map configurations so that you can come back to them later and tweak them according to requirements. [1] If you’ve selected Is Public for the Template at the time of saving, it will be visible to all CRM users of AppJetty MappyField 365. [2] Note: If template is
- [Multiple Routes](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/direction/multiple-routes/) - By clicking on any location or plotted records, click on Add Location to add multiple way points or you can add manually by clicking on the Add Location from the ‘Routes tab’. As you add all the required location and click on GO button, you will get the routes based on the location of multiple
- [Direction](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/direction/) - Once you add the records to ‘Origin’ & to ‘Destination’, you can check in to the Routes tab. From here by clicking on the GO button, you will get the route navigation with details. [1] From the Route tab, you can also add multiple addresses and get directions. On the Map, you will
- [Help & Full Screen](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/map-view-quick-options/help-full-screen/) - From the right side on the MappyField365 header, there are two options provided: → Help → Full-Screen View. [1] Help You will get the Help option regarding MappyField 365. [2] Full-Screen View You can enter the Full-screen view. [3] By clicking on the ‘Full screen’ icon, the map view will
- [MappyField 365 Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/map-view-quick-options/mappyfield-365-configuration/) - You can navigate to the default set up of the MappyField 365.
- [Map view Quick options](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/map-view-quick-options/) - MappyField 365 Configurations Help Full-Screen View It will be easy to perform some action from the map itself, you will not require to navigate the individual options.
- [Select Entity](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/plot-records-on-map/select-entity/) - By clicking on the Plot, you can plot multiple records by selecting different entities. [1] First, select Entity from the ‘Select Entity’ dropdown option. You will get the dropdown list of entities as mapped in Entity Mappings configuration. [2] Select View from the ‘Select Entity’ dropdown option. [3] After selection of ‘Entity’
- [Pin Selection for Records](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/plot-records-on-map/pin-selection-for-records/) - Every time when you add a new entity the pin will be added with different color. Multiple pin options are also available to differentiate multiple entity (legend) records, options will be listed by clicking on the existing pin. You can change the pin color and its shape by clicking on the pin of
- [Cluster Map Records](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/plot-records-on-map/cluster-map-records/) - For all the pins added on the map, there is an option available to cluster them. [1] By selecting the Cluster option, the pins will get clustered based on the proximity. It will make a group of nearby pins indicating the number of markers. [2] Note: On zooming in to the map, number
- [Plot Records on Map](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/plot-records-on-map/)
- [Google Map](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/google-map/)
- [Territory Management](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/territory-management/territory-management/) - To perform territory management, click on the Territory Management from the MappyField 365 navigation pane. [1] Different search options available are By Region, By Drawing, By Territory, By File. By Region: This option helps users to search for regions on the map i.e. City, County, State, Country and Postal Code. By Drawing:
- [Quick Access Territory Management](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/territory-management/quick-access-territory-management/) - You will find the Heat map ‘Quick’ access option besides the Menu of the MappyField 365. [1] By clicking on the ‘Territory Management’ icon, a Territory Management will open as Quick access view. From here you can create territory & manage it. You can enter the Territory Management in the Full screen by
- [Territory Management](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/territory-management/) - Create the new territories or manage existing territories to define regional/area based activities from the Map. You can plot regions on map based on files, by location of regions, and by drawing. Based on plotted regions, you can use the Alignment tool to select the required regions and create new territories. Also, you can
- [Heat Map Navigation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/heat-map/heat-map-navigation/) - By clicking on Heat Map from the navigation panel, the Heat Map page will be open and load with plotted records as per the default template selection. You can plot records of the Entities on the Heat map that are already configured in “Entity To Map”. [1] It would open a map for
- [Quick Access Heat Map](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/heat-map/quick-access-heat-map/) - You will find the Heat map ‘Quick’ access option besides the Menu of the MappyField 365. [1] By clicking on the ‘Heat Map’ icon, a Heat Map will open as Quick access view. Here, the Heat Map will load with default plotted data as per the default template. You can enter the Heat
- [Heat Map](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/heat-map/) - Get the aggregated visualization by selecting the data sources of any Entity to check the statistical data. You will have two options to access the Heat Map: -> A quick access option from the Map itself. -> Individual Heat Map from the MappyField 365 navigation pane on the left side.
- [Calendar View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/calendar-view/) - You can also view the plotted records in the calendar view along with the Map view. [1] You can view the calendar on a daily, weekly, and monthly basis. On clicking the activity from the calendar view, it will give the details of that record. [2] After clicking you can also see
- [Show Detail](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/contextual-menu/show-detail/) - By clicking on the Show Detail option from the Context Menu, you will get the popup window of the ‘Public Details’ from the right side as per the location. [1] You will get the address details of the location. You can search the POI places and get the direction from the selected location. [2]
- [Auto Schedule Records](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/auto-schedule-records/) - You will find the Auto Schedule Records option only from the ‘Data Grid’. Select the required data from the Data Grid and click on Auto Schedule icon. [1] Once you clicked on Auto Schedule icon, you will get a Warning message regarding the removing the plotted records from the map. [2] By clicking OK,
- [Add Record to Route](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/data-grid/add-record-to-route/) - Select the records and click on the “Add Record to Route” icon to add the records to the route. [1] By clicking on that icon, the ‘Routes’ tab will appear with the selected records of the data grid. The locations will be added based on the record selection in Data Grid. [2]
- [Data Grid](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/data-grid/) - Data Grid provides listing of records which are plotted on the map. You can perform the different actions and manage the records from the Data Grid. To view the plotted records in the data grid, click on Show Data. [1] By clicking on Show Data, a slider will open. You can view the
- [POI-Point of Interest](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/poi-point-of-interest/) - If you want to search specific locations like restaurant, coffee shops, hotels, airport, gas station, etc. near the plotted records, click on Point of Interest tab. You must insert the location; the autofill dropdown will appear. You will get the POI location bases on your location. [1] Under the POI tab, select the location/place
- [Add New Location](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/locations/add-new-location/) - You can add the important location like property, land inquiry purposes, from the map by right-clicking on that specific location → Add Locations. [1] By clicking on the Add to Location, Add New Location popup will appear. The Zoom level will be selected as per the Map view and enter Location Click on “Save”
- [Templates](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/templates/) - Templates feature helps you save map configurations so that you can come back to them later and tweak them according to requirement. If you’ve selected Is Public for the Template at the time of saving, it will be visible to all CRM users of AppJetty MappyField 365. [1] Note: If template is not
- [Save Route](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/direction/save-route/) - Also, the selected route can be saved for future reference. To save a route, click on the Save icon available on the top. [1] By clicking on Save icon, it opens a dialog box where you need to provide a name to the route and user/team name to whom the route is being assigned.
- [Asset (Trucks)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/direction/asset-trucks/) - If you have configured the “Asset” (truck) and managed, you can add the truck’s route to transport the items. [1] Once you add the waypoints (starting-ending points), click on the ‘truck’ icon to select which truck is required to transport the items. By clicking on the ‘truck’ icon, you will see the Asset Details
- [Multiple Routes](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/direction/multiple-routes/) - By clicking on any location or plotted records, click on Add to Destination to add multiple way points or you can add manually by clicking on the Add Destination from the ‘Routes tab’. As you add all the required location and click on GO button, you will get the routes based on the location of
- [Direction](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/direction/) - Once you add the records to ‘Origin’ & to ‘Destination’, you can check in to the Routes From here by clicking on the GO button, you will get the route navigation with details. From the Route tab, you can also add multiple address and get directions. You can reverse the direction by clicking on
- [Delete Record](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-options/delete-record/) - By clicking on delete button, selected record from map gets deleted from the CRM.
- [Create New Activity](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-options/add-appointment/) - You can create a new activity for a record by clicking on “Create New Activity” icon associated with specific record. For example lets create an appointment. [1] Select the Appointment from the select activity and fill the required fields to create an appointment. [2] Appointment should have a subject and time details.
- [Knowledge Article](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-options/knowledge-article/) - You can check the Knowledge Article which is shared with the selected record. [1] By clicking on the Knowledge Article, you will navigate to the ‘Active Articles’ page. [2]
- [Point of Interest](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-options/point-of-interest/) - You can search for nearby attractions, hotels, airports, restaurants, coffee shops, gas stations, etc. from the Point of Interest. It will take the address of the selected record as POI location to search nearby places. [1] After selecting the specific Point of Interest options, click on the GO The selected POI options will
- [Related Records](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-options/related-records/) - By clicking on “Related Records” icon, all related records to the plotted record get plotted on the map. [1] Here, as there were three contacts associated with the account, all three of them will get plotted on the map. [2]
- [Proximity Search](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-options/proximity-search/) - From the detail cared of the selected record, Proximity Search lets you to view nearby records in proximity of the selected record based on time or distance. [1] You can define distance either in miles or kilometers as well as time in minutes. You can also perform concentric proximity search based on distance
- [Direction](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-options/direction/) - By clicking on the Directions à Add to Origin option, address of that record will be added as starting point in Routes. [1] From Routes tab you will get address of your customer’s location. On the map, the ‘Starting Point’ will be assigned as A with the address of that record displayed. [2]
- [Tooltip Details](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-options/tooltip-details/) - By clicking on any specific record (pin), you will get details related to that record based on configured from the backend. By clicking on that, the details of the Slider will open from the right side. [1] From the records detail card from the slider will let you perform different actions related to the
- [Map View options](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-options/) - There are many options and actions provided to manage the map records easily from the Map View. [1] Details on Hover You can view record name by hovering on any Information shown on hover is completely customizable from the Entity Mapping. [2]
- [By User/ Team](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/search-options/by-user-team/) - You can search and plot the entity records based on Users and/or Teams from the ‘Search Options’. It would plot all records that are created by the individual User or the Team. By clicking on Search button, the records of the selected user will be plotted on the map. Note: This search option
- [By Proximity](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/search-options/by-proximity/) - It lets you view nearby records in proximity from current location based on Distance or Time. You can define distance either in miles or kilometers as well as time in minutes. [1] [2] DynamicsCRM user can also search the records using the ‘Proximity Search’ from the mobile or tab. [3]
- [By Territory](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/search-options/by-territory/) - You can also view records on maps based on Territory. By selecting the ‘Territory’ in search option , you will get the list of Territories in dropdown. [1] Select the Territory/Territories the records of which you want to display on the map. Now, on clicking Search button, all records that fall under the
- [By Drawing](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/search-options/by-drawing/) - You can plot the data by defining your own shapes. By selecting the Drawing search option, the drawing tool will enable you to draw the following shapes: Polygon, Circle and Square. [1] For free drawing select the ‘Polygon’ shape, just by single clicking on the map drag the mouse cursor the shape will be
- [By Region](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/search-options/by-region/) - By region option lets you plot records on the map based on the region of your choice. The various regions that you can select one from are City, State, Country, and Postal Code. [1] If you select the State, you need to insert the ‘State’ name for that you need to check the
- [Search Options](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/search-options/) - You can plot the records of particular entity based on different Search Options. You can search and plot the records based on five Search Options: > Region > Drawing > Territory > Proximity > By User
- [Summary Card](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/advance-options/summary-card/) - Clicking on ‘Open Summary Card’ icon, you can view total number of records and other entity related details plotted on map as configured from the back end.
- [Category Search](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/advance-options/category-search/) - You can perform Category Search on single as well as multiple entities. Performing this search will list out all attributes of the selected entity. These attributes visible in the category listing dropdown can be managed under the Entity Configurations Next, you need to select attribute based on which record should be plotted. Here, it
- [Save Template](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/advance-options/save-template/) - All the plotting data made along with zoom level configurations can be saved as a Template. By clicking on Save Template icon, a dialog box opens to give a name to the template. Moreover, you can select the box Is Public to make the template public. To save the existing template, click on the
- [Layer Card](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/advance-options/layer-card/) - With every plotting records on the map, it would show each plotting as Layer menu. Layer Card (Layer Menu) displays all plotted record of the entities in one place. [1] From the ‘Layer Card’, you can hide/show the records on the map and visible/invisible the ‘labels’ of the pushpins. When the records
- [Multiple Map Views](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-quick-options/street-side-views/) - We provide multiple map views like Road Map, Aerial, and Bird’s Eye for the better understanding.[1] Road Map From the Map, the street side view option is provided to check the street view of the location. You will get the Street view of Bing maps. [2] Aerial Look Aerial look
- [Help & Full Screen](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-quick-options/help-full-screen/) - From the right side on the MappyField365 header, there are two options are provided: > Help > Full Screen View. [1] Help You will get the Help option regarding the MappyField 365. [2] Full Screen View You can enter the Full screen view. [3] By clicking on the ‘Full screen’ icon, the
- [MappyField 365 Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-quick-options/mappyfield-365-configuration/) - You can navigate to the default set up of the MappyField 365.
- [Map view Quick options](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-quick-options/) - You will find some quick actions from the header menu of the activity map. The Quick actions are: - Calendar View - Heat Map - Territory Management - MappyField365 Configuration - Help - Full Screen view It will be easy to perform some action from the map itself, you will not require to navigate
- [Cluster Map Records](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/plot-the-records-on-map/cluster-map-records/) - For all the pins added on the map, there is an option available to cluster them. [1] By selecting the Cluster option, the pins will get clustered based on the proximity. It will make a group of nearby pins indicating the number of markers. [2] Note: On zooming in to the map, number
- [Pin selection for records](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/plot-the-records-on-map/pin-selection-for-records/) - Every time when you add a new entity the pin will be added with different color. Multiple pin options are also available to differentiate multiple entity (legend) records, options will be listed by clicking on existing pin. You can change the pin color and its shape by clicking on the pin of any
- [Select Entity](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/plot-the-records-on-map/select-entity/) - By clicking on the Plot, you can plot the multiple records by selecting the different entities. [1] First, select Entity from the ‘Select Entity’ dropdown option. You will get the dropdown list of entities as per mapped in Entity Mappings configurations. [2] Select View from the ‘Select Entity’ dropdown option. [3] After selection
- [Default Location](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/default-location/) - You will get the default location with the pin on the map as per the configuration in Map Configuration Detail. [1] You can set the default location from the Map by right-clicking on your specific location. As you right-clicked, the map view options will appear. Click on Save Settings > Default Location. [2]
- [Map view & its options](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-its-options/) - You can plot the Entity records and perform the different actions and activities from the Map. Map view options: 1. MappyField 365 navigation pane for Bing Maps, Google Maps and Configurations. 2. You will have five tabs (options) to view and search the records by selecting the fields and options: -> Plot
- [Bing Map](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/) - MappyField 365 Map View & its functionalities Select the MappyField 365 from the Dynamics 365 dashboard or app list from the header. [1] By clicking on the MappyField 365, you will navigate to the Map view of the MappyField 365 with all default configurations and all the entities which are already configured in
- [Asset (Truck Management)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/asset-truck-management/) - “Dynamics 365 Asset Management” is about Supply Chain Management, which is used in the daily operation of any organization. It could be machinery, any equipment, or transportation (trucks). MappyField 365 provides Asset Management separately. From the navigation panel, you will see the Asset menu. By clicking on it, you will be redirected to the
- [Entity Mappings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/entity-mappings/) - Navigate to Configuration -> Entity Mappings to display the entity with its relevant details on MappyField 365. From here you can add a new entity and configure its required details. [1] By clicking on Entity Mapping, the list of entities can be seen which are already mapped. Click on “New” button, this will
- [Security Template Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/setup-for-admin/security-template-configuration/) - The only System administrator or User with AppJetty MappyField 365 Admin role can create Security Template for other CRM users with AppJetty MappyField 365 User role. User admin can assign selected actions to different users using security templates for the different CRM users i.e. Sales Reps, Service Executive, Field Reps, etc. From the MappyField
- [User Wise Map Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/setup-for-admin/user-wise-map-configuration/) - On assignment of any role like AppJetty MappyField 365 Admin, AppJetty MappyField 365 User or System Administrator role, configuration settings record must be created. This can be accessed by navigating to Map Configuration. [1] On navigating to MappyField 365 Configuration, it would show list of all the users with MappyField 365 role or System
- [General](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/setup-for-admin/general-2/) - Enable Google Map Geocoding: Checkmark the box to enable the Google Maps Geocoding in MappyField 365. Click on the Save button to save the settings.
- [Default Limits](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/setup-for-admin/default-limits-2/) - Set “Default Limits” for distance unit and direction. - Distance Unit: Select to measure the distance in ‘Kilometers’ or ‘Miles’. - Direction: Select the direction as per either ‘Shortest Time’ or ‘Shortest Distance’.
- [Default Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/setup-for-admin/default-configurations-2/) - Under “Default Configuration” option, set default Latitude, Longitude and Zoom level for map when it is opened for the first time. [1] You can set the default location using the map as well by clicking on “Set latitude, longitude and zoom level on map” option available on the right-hand corner. By clicking on
- [Google Map Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/setup-for-admin/google-map-configurations/) - - Enable Google Maps: Checkmark the box to enable the Google Maps in MappyField 365. - Google Map API Key: Enter the Google Map API key which you have generated. Note: To assist you further, you will find a link beneath the text box that states How to generate Google Map API Key.
- [General](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/setup-for-admin/general/) - Heat Map Settings: You can also set colors for ‘Heat Map’ configuration which would indicate the intensity of the data. i.e. High, Medium, and Low. Enable Live Traffic: A user can also enable/disable Live traffic on Bing Maps and Optimize the route using SPF (Shortest Path First) feature from the configuration. Optimize Route:
- [Default Limits](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/setup-for-admin/default-limits/) - Set “Default Limits” for distance unit and direction. - Distance Unit: Select to measure the distance in ‘Kilometers’ or ‘Miles’. - Direction: Select the direction as per either ‘Shortest Time’ or ‘Shortest Distance’.
- [Bing Maps Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/setup-for-admin/setup/) - To manage the default configuration settings of MappyField 365, click on ‘Setup’ tab and enter default configurations. Admin user can set the default view of the map by configuring from here. Bing Map API Key: Enter Bing map API key which you have generated from. Note: To assist you further, you will
- [Insert Licence Key](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/mappyfield-365-installation/insert-licence-key/) - Enter the New License key received in mail. This will enable the ‘Activate’. [1] Click on ‘Activate’ button to activate your license. Default settings under set up tab can be managed only if a user has System Administrator Role, AppJetty MappyField 365 Admin. Or else it would show error message stating “You don’t
- [Activate Your Free Trial](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/mappyfield-365-installation/activate-your-free-trial/) - Double click on ‘MappyField 365’ solution to configure the plugin with your license key. This will open up a new window. Click on ‘Configuration’ from the options provided on the left side. You can activate your one-month free trial. To get a one-month free trial license key, fill out the details and click
- [Installation Steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/mappyfield-365-installation/installation-steps/) - > To install ‘MappyField 365’ plugin, the following steps are to be followed: On purchasing the plugin, you will get a zip file named "MappyField 365 365.zip". Login into your CRM Account and click on Settings -> Solution. Click on ‘Import’ to upload and install the Solution. [1] Click on ‘Choose
- [Dynamics 365- MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365/) - Version: 6.2 Compatibility: Dynamics CRM 2016 or Dynamics 365, Online or On-premises or PowerApps
- [SuiteCRM Installation & Activation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/suitecrm-installation-activation/) - You will see how to install and activate the Survey Rocket into the SuiteCRM.
- [Data Piping](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/data-piping/) - Data Piping allows you to pre-fill your survey form with the existing CRM data. At the same time, you can also update your CRM records using your survey responses. To enable Data Piping for your survey, check the ‘Enable Data Piping’ check box. Now select a module from the following: Accounts, Contacts Leads
- [Other Options for Survey](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/) - There are many other relevant options & configurations to manage the Survey & Survey forms as per your requirement.
- [Activate your plug-in](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/suitecrm-installation-activation/activate-your-plug-in/) - After successful package installation, you need to validate your license and activate your Survey Rocket from Survey Rocket Configuration panel. Log-in to your SuiteCRM as admin and go to Administrator Page. You can see the ‘Survey Rocket’ section on this page. Now, click on ‘License Configuration’ link, this will re-direct you to License
- [Create Survey & Survey Form](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-survey-form/) - How to Create a Survey? The users can design a new survey form in two ways: Design a Survey Template and use it to create multiple Surveys. Build a New Survey from Scratch
- [Contact Us](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/contact-us-8/) - We simplify your business, offer unique business solution in digital web and IT landscapes. Live Chat Get instant support with our Live Chat. Visit our product page at: https://www.appjetty.com/suitecrm-survey-rocket.htm and click on the Live Chat button for instant support. Tickets Raise tickets for your specific question! Send an
- [Poll within Survey module](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/poll-within-survey-module-2/) - To create a Poll, select ‘Create Poll’ option from the Survey Module dropdown. This will open up a page to create Poll. Fill in all the necessary information. You can upload a logo and select a theme that suits your requirement. A poll will have only one question which can either be a
- [View Survey Reports](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/view-survey-reports-2/) - Once a survey is sent, you can view various types of Reports based on that survey which represents the status of the survey using charts and tables. Survey Reports can be viewed by selecting the Analyse Report option from the list view or the detail view of the Surveys module. To view survey
- [Creating Survey Template](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-survey-form/creating-survey-template/) - One of the most common methods of a Survey Template creation is via the ‘Create Survey Template’ option in the Survey Template module tab. This opens up the edit view layout which allows you to set Survey form with different Survey Questions with pagination. Use the following steps to create a Survey Template
- [Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/suitecrm-installation-activation/configuration-2/)
- [Get activation key](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/suitecrm-installation-activation/get-activation-key/) - Get the activation key from the Order Confirmation Mail. OR Login to your AppJetty account then go to Downloadable options and copy the activation key for the Survey Rocket plug-in.
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/suitecrm-installation-activation/installation-2/) - To start with the installation, Log-in as Administrator into SuiteCRM. Go to the Administration page and click on ‘Module Loader’ to install the package. Browse the zip file and click on ‘Upload’ button under Module Loader screen. After uploading package, click on the ‘Install’ button to install the package. Click on ‘Commit’ button
- [MappyField 365 Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/) - You will see the following topics: - Installation - Activation - Configurations
- [Contact Us](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/contact-us-5/) - We simplify your business, offer unique business solution in digital web and IT landscapes. Live Chat Get instant support with our Live Chat. Visit our product page at: https://www.appjetty.com/dynamics365-mappyfield-365.htm and click on the Live Chat button for instant support. Tickets Raise tickets for your specific question! Send an email
- [Compatible With Mobile Devices](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/compatible-with-mobile-devices/) - MappyField 365 plugin is compatible with mobile and tablet devices, so sales reps and marketing managers will have flexibility to access data from anywhere and everywhere.
- [MappyField 365 inside entity record](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/mappyfield-365-inside-entity-record/) - You can enable the map of the MappyField 365 for an individual CRM entity record. You will get the records on the map inside the specific entity record from the DynamicsCRM backend side. For that you need to configure the “Form” and the “Web Resources” for the entity. You need to follow the below
- [Contextual Menu](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/contextual-menu/) - ‘Right click’ on to map to open Context Menu. It provides options as below: > Create New Record > Show Detail > Add Task > Add Appointment > Add to Route Add to Locations > Set as POI Location > Set As Current Location. You (or logged in CRMusers) can also set
- [Live User Tracking](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/live-user-tracking/) - Being an administrator of Dynamcis365, you can check live location of your team (users). If you have configured the Firebase in the MappyField 365, you can access the Live user tracking (for the users or resources). You can track all CRM users which are logged in on MappyField 365. For that navigate to
- [Locations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/locations/)
- [Advance Options](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/advance-options/) - From the left side of the MappyField map view, there are Advance options are given related to check, manage and configure the records on the map. - Layer Card - Save as Template - Marketing List - Select Category(Category wise Search) - Summary Card - Refresh
- [Plot the records on Map](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/plot-the-records-on-map/)
- [Individual Records on Map View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/individual-records-on-map-view/) - You can configure MappyField 365 maps for individual CRM records.
- [Define Geography](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/define-geography/) - You can define the geography for the territory from the CRM backend. To define the geography of the territory, navigate to the Advanced Settings → Settings → Business Management. [1] You will see the Sales Territories option to manage the territories from the CRM backend. You can also define the geography of the territory
- [Auto Territory Assign](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/auto-territory-assign/) - You or DynamicsCRM users can assign territory for existing record. It will automatically select the Territory based on the region. By selecting any account record, you will get an option as Assign Territory on header (ribbon). [1] Click on Assign Territory option to select the territory for the selected record. The territory as
- [Geocode Records](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/geocode-records/)
- [Setup for Admin](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/setup-for-admin/)
- [Activation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/activation/) - On expiration of Trial, a message will appear that the Trial is expired. [1] Now to purchase the license click on ‘Activate’ This will redirect you to our product page and a pop-up will appear. Click on ‘Add to Cart’ button and complete the purchase process. [2] On successfully completion of the
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/mappyfield-365-installation/)
- [View Poll Reports](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/poll-within-survey-module-2/view-poll-reports/) - Once a Poll is sent, you can view various types of Reports based on that Poll which represents the status of the Poll using charts and tables. Poll reports can be viewed by selecting the Analyse Report option from the list view or the detail view of the Surveys module. To view poll
- [Export Reports](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/view-survey-reports-2/export-reports/) - You can also export reports as required by clicking on Export button available on the top right section in survey reports. All available reports like status report, question wise report along with their different types like combined, email or open ended can be exported by clicking on Export button. Clicking on Export option,
- [Manual](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/view-survey-reports-2/manual/) - Manual Report displays the reports which are submitted on behalf of the customer using Take Survey in the supported modules. (Accounts, Contacts, Lead, and Targets)
- [Global Filters](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/global-filters/) - You can also filter responses as needed by applying global filters to the gathered data. There are two different global filters available: Filter By Date and Filter By Question Logic. Global Filters are available and get applied to question wise report and individual report. Filter By Date: To filter data based on date,
- [Survey Submission Sub-Panel](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/survey-submission-sub-panel/) - You can also view the details of survey transactions for individual records from the ‘Survey Submissions’ sub-panel in the detail view of the respective modules.
- [Survey Transactions](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/survey-transactions/) - View all the survey transactions at one place. ‘Survey Transactions’ displays the list of all surveys sent along with their mail delivery status, score details and module related parameters. You can also filter out the transactions based on different filtering criteria
- [Custom SMTP Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/custom-smtp-configuration/) - Use custom SMTP to send survey invitations through your own SMTP email account. This will increase the deliverability of your survey invitations by avoiding spam issues, email bounces and IP Blocks. To configure SMTP for sending surveys, navigate to Admin Panel and click on ‘Survey Rocket SMTP Setting’ link. Enter the necessary details
- [Survey Automation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/survey-automation/) - Send surveys automatically through survey automation module. Create a workflow from survey automation module to send surveys based on certain conditions that you set. Set Actions to determine to whom the survey should be sent to. Navigate to Admin Panel and click on ‘Survey Automation’ link. Now click on ‘Create’ button to create
- [Survey Sent Summary](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/survey-sent-summary/) - Once the survey is sent, a popup will appear displaying the ‘Summary of survey’
- [Sending Survey](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/sending-survey/) - Navigate to a module from which you wish to send Survey and select the list of persons to whom the survey should be sent. Now, click on the drop-down arrow and select ‘Send Survey’ option from the menu. On selecting ‘Send Survey’ option from the list, a pop-up window will appear from which
- [Creating an Email Template](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/creating-an-email-template/) - To create an email template, select ‘Manage Email Template’ option from the ‘Survey’ module select ‘Create Email Template’ option from the ‘Emails’ module. Select a survey and module (Accounts, Contacts, Users, Leads and Targets) from the drop-down list and click on ‘Insert Survey Link’ Button which will automatically insert the survey link inside the
- [Take Survey](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/take-survey/) - You can take survey on behalf of the customer. Take survey option will be available for modules like accounts, contacts, leads, and targets. To take survey, navigate to detail page of any supported Module -> Take Survey. It will open a pop up with the list of surveys. From there, you can click
- [Copying a Survey](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/copying-a-survey/) - Once a survey is sent or shareable link is generated, i.e. Survey is published, that survey cannot be edited again. Using the copy feature a copy of that same survey with all the configurations can be created. To create a copy of a survey, click on ‘Copy’ option from the actions dropdown besides Edit
- [Exporting Survey Form](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/exporting-survey-form/) - To export the survey form in PDF or DOC format, click on ‘Export as PDF’ or ‘Export as Doc’ option from the actions drop down besides Edit button. This will export the survey form as it is into a PFD or DOC file.
- [Multi-Language Support for Survey](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/multi-language-support-for-survey/) - Translate Survey option allows you to translate a particular survey into different language provided by CRM. To translate a survey, select ‘Translate’ option from the actions dropdown besides edit button. Default Survey Language will be the CRM Default Language. You can add a language for translation by clicking on ‘Add Language’ button.
- [Survey Preview](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/survey-preview/) - You can preview the survey that is created before sending. Survey can be previewed by selecting preview option available on the list view and in the detail view of the particular survey. In the list view of surveys, click on preview icon available in the list with every survey created. In the detail
- [Automate Survey Reminders](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/automate-survey-reminders/) - Send automated reminder email for the survey to a recipient who hasn’t responded in a certain time frame. To send a reminder email, check Recursive Email checkbox and choose an interval to set how often the reminder mail should be sent. You can also decide the number of times you want to send reminders
- [Generate Shareable Link](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/survey-other-options/generate-shareable-link/) - For sending out surveys to people other than the existing CRM records, or to send surveys using a web-link, use the shareable web link feature. To generate a shareable link, you can navigate to Detail view of that survey and click on ‘Get Shareable Link’ button. This will generate a shareable web link,
- [Creating Survey Thank You Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-survey-form/creating-survey-thank-you-page/) - Similarly, you can add a Thank you page at the end of a survey. You can customize the Thank you page as per your requirements using the inbuilt Tiny MCE Editor
- [Configuring Survey Footer](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-survey-form/configuring-survey-footer/) - Set customized footer for surveys using the TinyMCE editor.
- [Creating Survey Welcome Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-survey-form/creating-survey-welcome-page/) - You can add a survey welcome page to give a brief introduction of your survey before the respondent starts to attend. You can customize the welcome page as per your requirements using the inbuilt Tiny MCE Editor
- [Changing Question Type](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-survey-form/changing-question-type/) - To change the question type for an already selected question in the survey page, click on the ‘Type’ field. This will convert it into a dropdown with all the question types. Select a question type from the list and the existing type will be converted into the selected one.
- [Applying Skip Logic](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-survey-form/applying-skip-logic/) - Skip Logic feature allows you to customize your survey for each respondent by applying logic to the answer choices. Based on a respondent’s answer, branching logic will be created as per the conditions defined by you. To apply skip logic, you need to create the survey first and save it. Once you save a
- [“Other” option in Multi - Choice Question Type](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-survey-form/other-option-in-multi-choice-question-type/) - To allow respondents to give some other answer than those mentioned in the options, the ‘Other’ option feature can be used. Check the ‘Add other option textbox’ box to add an extra blank field along with the answer choices. You can also change the label as per your requirement to match the question.
- [Question Section Header](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-survey-form/question-section-header/) - To add a section header inside a survey page, click on the ‘Section Header’ icon on the top right corner of a question. This will add a section header above that question. By doing so you can categories questions into different sections in a single page.
- [Enable Scoring](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-survey-form/enable-scoring/) - Scoring feature can be enabled for 4 types of questions viz. Checkbox, Dropdown list, Radio Button and Multi Select List. To enable scoring while creating survey, check the ‘Enable Scoring’ checkbox. This will enable boxes to enter scores besides the answer choices. Enter score for each answer choice. The overall score can be
- [Building a new survey form](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-survey-form/building-a-new-survey-form/) - To create a new survey, select ‘Create Survey’ option from the Survey Template detail view or navigate to Survey module and click on ‘Create’ button. Fill up necessary details required for the survey. Give a Title to your Survey, mention the Start & End Date of the survey. You can also upload a
- [Adding and Editing Questions in the survey form](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/how-to-create-survey-form/creating-survey-template/adding-and-editing-questions-in-the-survey-form/) - The first step to building your survey is adding questions to your survey page. When you add a question to your survey, review the Answer Type options and settings to fine tune each one to meet your needs. Survey Rocket provides various answer types for Survey form: Survey Question Types Description Multi
- [About SuiteCRM SURVEY ROCKET](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/suitecrm-survey-rocket-ultimate/about-suitecrm-survey-rocket/) - Introduction AppJetty provides an effective solution in the form of Survey Rocket – A SuiteCRM based Plugin which is helpful for entrepreneurs to conduct surveys. It enables you to know your customers better by sending them a Survey questionnaire with several important questions; the answer to which can help you build better business
- [SuiteCRM SURVEY ROCKET (Ultimate)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/suitecrm-survey-rocket-ultimate/) - SURVEY ROCKET (Ultimate) Version: 4.2 SuiteCRM Compatibility: SuiteCRM: 7.4.* to 7.12.1
- [Installation Steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation-activation-2/installation-steps/) - Manual Installation (Installing Magento 2 extension by copying code) Step 1: For Windows OS: Go to /app/code. Under that, create the folders using the following hierarchy: Biztech - Magemobcart For Linux OS: Enter the following commands keeping their order: cd /app/code
- [Zipcode Validator](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/add-ons-with-magemob-app-builder/zipcode-validator/) - Admin can purchase the “Zipcode Validator” as an add-on to provide the functionality to the user to check whether product delivery in their own area is available or not. Backend Configuration If you have purchased the add-on, you must have AppJetty’s Zipcode Validator extension configured from the Magento backend. For that, navigate
- [Order Bifurcation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/order-bifurcation-magento-admin/) - Order Bifurcation (Magento Admin) You can check the placed order by navigating to the Sales → Orders from the Magento Backend. Once the customers place the orders from the MageMob App Builder, the admin can check on which mobile OS they have placed the orders from the Magento backend (Orders). From the
- [Edit Layout](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/application-configuration/edit-layout/) - By clicking on the Edit button of any Layout, you will be redirected to the “Edit Layout” page with different blocks displayed on the left side: > Featured Categories > Products Grid > Products Horizontal Slider > Banner Offer Slider > Countdown Timer Banner > Recently Accessed Products
- [Manage Offers](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/application-configuration/manage-offers/) - You can display ongoing and exciting offers to customers in the mobile app. You can create offer banners by navigating to the Mage Mob App Builder → Manage Offers. You will be redirected to the list of the offers where you can see the details like ID, Title, Offer Thumbnail, Status, Sort Order, and
- [Product Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/product-page/) - You can check the listing of the products, filter the products, and check the product details.
- [Firebase Analytics](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/firebase-analytics/) - Admin can track daily user engagement, device details of users, country location, and crash analytics as well. If any user is facing any crash while using an application, then we can get an idea from the analytics report and update the application if required.
- [Delivery Date Scheduler](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/add-ons-with-magemob-app-builder/delivery-date-scheduler/) - Admin can purchase the “Delivery Date Scheduler” as an add-on to provide the date and/or time selection to the user during the checkout of the order. Backend Configuration If you have purchased the add-on, you must have AppJetty’s Delivery Date Scheduler extension configured from the Magento backend. For that, navigate to Stores
- [Order confirmation & detail page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/add-ons-with-magemob-app-builder/order-confirmation-detail-page/) - Order Confirmation Once the date and/or time is selected, it can be seen on the checkout page. [1] Once the customer placed the order, they can see the scheduled delivery date on the Order Confirmation page. [2] Order Detail page The customer can check the placed order details with the delivery
- [Add Layout](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/application-configuration/add-layout/) - You can add a new layout as per your need by clicking on Add Layout button (top-right corner) from the listing page. You will be redirected to the Add Layout page where you need to insert the following details: Layout Title: Enter the Layout title. Store Views: Select the Store that you want
- [Manage Home Page Layout](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/application-configuration/manage-home-page-layout/) - Admin can showcase the products on the App’s dashboard by configuring various blocks from Magento Backend. Go to MageMob App Builder -> Manage Home Page Layout. You can manage and Add a new Layout. By clicking on ‘Manage Home Page Layout’, you will see already added layouts in the list view. You will see the
- [General Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magento-backend-configuration/general-configurations/) - Enabled: Select Yes to enable the MageMob Mobile App Builder extension. The extension is disabled by default. Search with Barcode: Select Yes to let your customers search products with barcodes. Allowed CMS Pages For Mobile: Select the CMS page to display in the App.
- [Extension Activation & Other Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/magento-backend-configuration/extension-activation-other-configuration/) - By clicking on Manage Configuration, you can activate the extension, set general configuration, and insert the Notification key for Android/iOS users. Copy an activation key Copy the activation key from the Order Confirmation Mail. OR Log into your account at www.appjetty.com using the email and password you have provided at the checkout
- [Magento Backend Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/magento-backend-configuration/) - You can configure the mobile app from the Backend configuration.
- [MageMob App Builder](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/magemob-app-builder-2/) - Now after Store Configurations, you need to manage the content, layouts and notification for App. Go to MageMob App Builder to manage the Notification and Home Page Layout. By clicking on ‘MageMob App builder’, you will get the three menus: > Manage Notification: To manage the Notifications to send the users.
- [Notifications](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/notification/) - You can check and manage the following "Notification" details: - Notification History - Notifications - Abandoned Cart Notifications
- [Magento Backend Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magento-backend-configuration/) - You need to configure the activation keys and different setups for the MageMob App Builder.
- [Installation & Activation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation-activation-2/) - You need to configure the following installation steps and then you will require the activation.
- [Mange Sequence of Blocks](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/application-configuration/edit-layout/mange-sequence-of-blocks/) - You can also manage all the blocks with the preferred sequence. You can reorder any of the blocks by dragging up-down positions. Based on the sequence, you will get your App’s Home page.
- [Recently Accessed Products](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/application-configuration/edit-layout/recently-accessed-products/) - You can add a block of Recently Accessed Products in the Home Page layout. It will display the last 20 products in a horizontal slider view.
- [Countdown Timer](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/application-configuration/edit-layout/countdown-timer/) - You can add a block (banner) with the countdown timer view. To display the countdown timer in the banner, you need to configure the timer banner. [1] By clicking on the ‘edit’ icon, you will get the popup of “Edit Countdown Timer Banner”. [2] You will see the list of existing countdown timer banners
- [Banners Slider](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/application-configuration/edit-layout/banners-slider/) - You can display the Banners of the new collections or product discount Offers on the home page of app. By clicking on the ‘Edit’ icon, a popup window will open named Edit Banner Slider. [1] If banners are already created, you will get the list of Banners with the details in the end. You
- [Product Horizontal Slider](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/application-configuration/edit-layout/product-horizontal-slider/) - Configuring from the Magento backend, you can display the products which are Bestseller, New arrival, and many other products in horizontal view in the app. By clicking on the ‘Edit’ icon, a popup window will open named Edit Product Horizontal Slider. Insert the details which you want to display in the app: Component Title:
- [Products Grid](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/application-configuration/edit-layout/products-grid/) - You can display the products in grid view by selecting the products from Magento Backend. You must select a minimum of 4 products to display in Product Grid. [1] You can select the N-Number of products for the Product Grid. More buttons will be displayed to check more products from the Product Grid in-app.
- [Featured Categories](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/application-configuration/edit-layout/featured-categories/) - You can select the N-Number of products in the Featured Categories block on the Home Page layout of the app. Blocks will be horizontally slidable. [1] By clicking on ‘Edit’ icon, a popup window will open named Edit Featured Category Block. [2] Here you can add and manage the category blocks as
- [Application Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/application-configuration/) - You can customize the page layouts to display in the Mobile App (Store View) to the end-users.
- [Manage Abandoned Cart Notification](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/notification/manage-abandoned-cart-notification/) - You can remind the customers about the products that are added to the cart but are still pending checkout. By navigating to MageMob App Builder → Manage Abandoned Cart Notification, you will be redirected to the list page. You will see the list of abandoned cart notifications in the grid view which are already
- [Schedule Notification](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/notification/schedule-notification/) - You can schedule the notification to send it to the app users at a specific time duration. You need to enable the “Schedule Status”. Once you enable the status, you will see the “Schedule Type” option. You can schedule One Time or Recurring notifications. [1] One Time: If you want to send the
- [Manage Notification](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/notification/manage-notification/) - You can add and manage the notifications by navigating to the MageMob App Builder → Manage Notification. You can make your customers aware of the special offers, discounts, upcoming products, etc. by sending these notifications. [1] By clicking on Manage Notification, you will see the list of notifications in the grid view which are
- [Manage Notification History](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/notification/manage-notification-history/) - By clicking on Manage Notification History, you will navigate to the list of the notifications and check the notification that is sent. Here, you will see the notification history in the grid view. You will see the details like Notification History ID, Title of the notification, Message, Send To (customer details), and Date with
- [Contact Us](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/contact-us-6/) - We simplify your business, offer unique business solution in digital web and IT landscapes. Live Chat Get instant support with our Live Chat. Visit our product page at: https://www.appjetty.com/magento-magemob-app-builder.htm and click on the Live Chat button for instant support. Tickets Raise tickets for your specific question! Send an email
- [Points to Note](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/points-to-note-4/) - Products in all the modules of MageMob App Builder will only be visible if they are assigned to the website selected while purchasing the Extension. You can try our MageMob Mobile App Builder demo app from Play Store or App Store. App Store link: https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/magemob-cart-customer-mobile/id1039362898?mt=8 Play Store link: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.biztech.magemobcart You will
- [Mobile App (Frontend View)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/) - Magento 2 MageMob Mobile App Builder is a mobile app extension that helps you to build a custom mobile app for your Magento 2 Store easily and quickly. Apps built with MageMob Mobile App Builder are optimized for both Android and iOS platforms and mobile responsive also. After configuring the MageMob App Builder from
- [GDPR Activation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magento-backend-configuration/gdpr-activation/) - GDPR Activation: If this option is enabled, the users need to check the ‘privacy policy’ at the time of the registration from the App Builder app. If it is disabled, the users can ignore the checkbox and proceed with the registration process.
- [Help Desk](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magento-backend-configuration/help-desk/) - Help Desk: Admin can display store details on the Contact Us page of MageMob App.
- [Order Notification](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magento-backend-configuration/order-notification/) - Notification for Order Status: Select ‘Yes’ to enable the notification for change in order status to be send to your customers. Order Status: Select the status of order for which you would like to send the notification to your customers. Choose OS: Select the OS from ‘Android’, ‘iOS’ or ‘Both’ for which you
- [Theme Selection](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magento-backend-configuration/theme-selection/) - Theme Selection: You can set look and feel of your MageMob application. Primary Color: This will be the base color of the application. Secondary Color: This will be the background color of all buttons. Background Color: This will be the background color of the application. Button Text Color: This will be
- [Notification Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magento-backend-configuration/notification-configuration/) - Notification Key: Insert “authorization key” to send the notification to the Android/IOS users.
- [Bottom Navigation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magento-backend-configuration/bottom-navigation/) - You can customize the bottom navigation feature for the App Builder. To enable the bottom navigation, you need to select Yes. By selecting ‘Yes’, you will see the list of the “Bottom Navigation Modules”. You can select a minimum of 2 modules and a maximum of 4 modules from the list. The ‘Home page’
- [About MageMob App Builder](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magemob-app-builder-2/about-magemob-app-builder/) - Introduction AppJetty offers a mobility solution to your users in the form of MageMob Mobile App Builder and helps them to access your store and place orders through their mobile on the go. You must have extension for store owners, which allows their customers to place orders from their mobile. It is easy
- [Preferences](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mobile-app-frontend-view/preferences/)
- [Draft Territory](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/territory-management/draft-territory/) - If you want to create a new territory, you can save it as a draft for a while. You need to insert relevant “Territory Name” and “Select Manager” from the drop-down selection. Note: If you select the “Create new territory”, only then you will get the Save As Draft button. [1] By clicking
- [Assign Parent Territory](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/territory-management/assign-parent-territory/) - After right-clicking on the existing territory, you will see three options as follow: - Assign Parent Territory - Copy To - Move To You can assign parent territory to any existing territory from the territory map itself. Once you plot the territory using the “Territory” search option, select that specific territory using the
- [Resource Tracking](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/live-user-tracking/resource-tracking/) - Select the users to track them. By selecting the Users and click on Search button, User tracking details can be seen on the map. [1] [2] Note: Following conditions needs to be fulfilled in order to track user’s location. - Configure the Firebase to enable user tracking in the MappyField 365. -
- [M2_DELIVERY DATE SCHEDULER](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/delivery-date-scheduler/) - DELIVERY DATE SCHEDULER Version: 1.2.3 Compatibility: Magento Community Edition 2.1.* to 2.4.*
- [M2 Language Translator](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2-language-translator/) - Language Translator Version: 2.1.1 Compatibility: Community Edition: 2.1.*,2.2. *,2.3. *, 2.4*
- [Magento2 Geolocation Redirect](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magento2-geolocation-redirect/) - Geolocation Redirect Version: 1.0.4 Compatibility: Community Edition: 2.2. *, 2.3. *, 2.4.*
- [M2_Australia Post Shipping](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_australia-post-shipping/) - Australia Post Shipping Version: 2.0.5 Compatibility: Community Edition 2.0. *, 2.1. *, 2.2.*, 2.3.*, 2.4.*
- [MappyField 365 Reporting Activity Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/analytical-dashboard/mappyfield-365-reporting-activity-dashboard/) - By clicking on MappyField 365 Reporting Dashboard, you will get the Dashboard with following dashlets: > Activity Summary > My Routes or All Routes Activities Summary: It displays summary of all the activities like Task, Phone calls Appointment, Service Activity of current day in list view. You can search the record as per
- [MappyField 365 Service Activity Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/analytical-dashboard/mappyfield-365-service-activity-dashboard/) - By clicking on MappyField 365 Service Activity Dashboard, you will get the Dashboard of Service Activities with following dashlets: > Cases Reported Today > Cases Resolved Today Cases Reported Today: This dashlet would show all the cases reported on a particular day for the currently logged in user. It can be further filtered based
- [MappyField 365 Sales Performance Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/analytical-dashboard/mappyfield-365-sales-performance-dashboard/) - By clicking on MappyField 365 Sales Activity Dashboard, you will get the Dashboard of Sales Activities with following dashlets: > My New Accounts This Month > Won/Lost Opportunities This Month > New Leads This Month My New Accounts This Month: It will display all open leads created this month. [1] Won/Lost Opportunities
- [MappyField 365 Sales Activity Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/analytical-dashboard/mappyfield-365-sales-activity-dashboard/) - By clicking on MappyField 365 Sales Activity Dashboard, you will get the Dashboard of Sales Activities with following dashlets: Lead By Source > Open Leads > Sales Pipeline > Top 10 Invoices Leads by Source: It will display all open leads based on their source creation. It can be an Advertisement, Employee Referral,
- [MappyField 365 Overview Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/analytical-dashboard/mappyfield-365-overview-dashboard/) - You will get the MappyField 365 Overview Dashboard with following dashlets: > Activity Planner > Schedule > Todays Follow-up Cases By Priority > Top 10 Opportunities Activities Planner: It displays activities like Task, Appointment, Service Activity of current month in map related to activities related to account/customer. [1] Schedule: It displays all
- [Heat Map Templates](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/heat-map/heat-map-templates/) - Once all the Heat Map is generated by selecting the Data sources of any entity, you can check the records in the Summary Card and save the heat map as a template. [1] By clicking on the ‘Summary Card’ icon, you will get the total records with the data source details. By clicking
- [Shape Operations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/territory-management/shape-operations/) - For drawing shapes plotted on map, user can select shapes that are drawn using drawing tool and right click on them to select binary operations. There are five different shape operations available: > Difference > Intersection >Union > Union Aggregate > Disjunctive Union. Note:
- [By File](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/territory-management/by-file/) - You can plot the territories by selecting the shape files with supported extensions .shp, .kml, and .geojson. You can also import the CSV file or create CSV file as per the sample file. [1] You can download the Sample CSV File and update the details in the CSV file. [2] Once you update
- [Copy Or Move Territory](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/territory-management/copy-or-move-territory/) - You can also manage the existing territory by copying or moving to another of any search options. [1] Copy/Move Territory: Right clicking on selected region/shape that is an existing territory, it would show option to copy or move territory. [2] Clicking on Copy to/Move to would open a dialog box to select if
- [Manage Hierarchical Territory](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/territory-management/manage-hierarchical-territory/) - You can create any territory using the required search options. After selecting the plotted area, right-click on it and you will see the Create New Territory option. By clicking on the “Create New Territory” option, you will see the + Create new territory popup with mainly three options to manage the territories: [1]
- [Create New Activity](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/contextual-menu/create-new-activity/) - From the Context Menu, you can directly add a Task and an Appointment. You can add the activities that are enabled from the CRM backend. By clicking on the Create New Activity, “Create Activity” popup will appear. [1] By clicking on the Add Task or the Add Appointment, the popup will appear to
- [Create New Record](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/contextual-menu/create-new-record/) - It can be Account, Contact or Lead. Upon selection of the option, you are redirected to a particular entity page of record creation.
- [Auto Schedule Records](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/data-grid/auto-schedule-records/) - You can auto-schedule the selected records by clicking on this icon. [1] As you click on it, the warning message will appear that just inform that the plotted records will be cleared on the map. [2]
- [Manage Territory](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/data-grid/manage-territory/) - From the Data Grid, you can add your selected records in the specific Territory. As you click on Territory icon, the Mange Territory window will open. [1] You need to select the Territory and after that click on Save button. [2] Here you will get the dropdown list of the Territories as per
- [Send Email Using Template](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/data-grid/send-email-using-template/) - Send Email by selecting the records. As you click on Email icon, the Send Email popup window will open. You need to select the Email Template. [1] By selecting an email template, you can send the Email on the email ids of the selected records. By clicking on Send Email button the
- [Assign to User/Team:](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/data-grid/assign-to-user-team/) - You can directly assign the selected record to the User/Team. As you click on that icon, the Assign to User or Team popup window will open to select the User/Team. [1] After selecting User/Teams, click on the Assign button. [2] Add Activity: You can add the Task of selected records by clicking
- [How to configure the Firebase?](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/live-user-tracking/how-to-configure-the-firebase/) - We must configure the Firebase for “Live tracking”. Follow the below steps: Go the Firebase website, open this link: https://console.firebase.google.com/ Here you need to add a new project by clicking on the + Add project. Give a suitable name to your project and click on Continue to configure the details. In next,
- [Contact Us](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/delivery-date-selection-on-product-page/) - We simplify your business, offer unique business solution in digital web and IT landscapes. Live Chat Get instant support with our Live Chat. Visit our product page at: https://www.appjetty.com/magento2-delivery-date-scheduler.htmand click on the Live Chat button for instant support. Tickets Raise tickets for your specific question! Send an email
- [Graphql Endpoints](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magento-api-rest-and-graphql-api/graphql-endpoints/) - Customer Order details with Delivery information. Query: { customerOrders { items { order_number created_at grand_total status delivery_timeslot shipping_arrival_comments shipping_arrival_date } } } Delivery date information for date picker or timeslot in Checkout page. Query: { deliveryInformationAtCheckoutPage { templateConfig { useTemplate deliverydateComments deliverydateLabel displayHtml showHtml } general { enabled disabledDates ProductWiseCharges deliveryOption add_comment comment_required
- [Rest API end points](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magento-api-rest-and-graphql-api/rest-api-end-points/) - Get delivery info in the existing order details API: URL: SiteURL/rest/V1/order/:order_id Delivery info of order in the search Criteria or Filter: Delivery date information for date picker or timeslot. URL : baseurl/rest/V1/deliverydateinfo
- [Magento API: REST AND GRAPHQL API](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magento-api-rest-and-graphql-api/)
- [Edit Delivery Date](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/admins-magento-dashboard/edit-delivery-date/) - From the Order detail page, you will find the Edit option under the Shipping & Handling Information. By clicking on the Edit button, the shipping date can be changed by Admin as per requirement. By selecting the Delivery Date, Time Slot & inserting the comments, click on the Update Delivery Date option.
- [Sales Orders](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/admins-magento-dashboard/sales-orders/) - Admin can view the delivery date information from the Sales -> Orders.
- [Delivery Date Calendar](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/admins-magento-dashboard/delivery-date-calendar/) - Once the customers place the orders, the admin can view all the orders under the “Delivery Date Calendar.” For that, navigate to Delivery Date -> Delivery Date Calendar from the Magento navigation pane. From the calendar, you will get the order number detail as per the ordered date. By clicking on the order no.,
- [Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/admins-magento-dashboard/dashboard/) - Once the customer’s order by selecting their preferable deliver date with the time slot, admin can get the details on the Dashboard. Admin’s dashboard view for “Delivery date calendar” where admin can see no. of order scheduled for a particular date with its details.
- [Edit Delivery Date](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/store-view-frontend/edit-delivery-date/) - Customer can edit the “delivery date” even after placing the order. Customer can navigate to the “Order View” from their account and under the Order information, they will find the Edit button to update the Delivery Date. Once the customer edited the Delivery date options, they must click on the Delivery Date button. Note:
- [Date selection for Multiple Addresses](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/store-view-frontend/date-selection-for-multiple-addresses/) - If you have enabled the “Delivery Date selection for the multiple addresses” option from the Delivery Date configuration, the customers would be able to select the desired delivery date multiple addresses for their orders from the Checkout page. The customers will get the option of “Multiple Addresses” on the Shopping Cart page. By
- [Delivery Date Selection](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/store-view-frontend/delivery-date-selection/) - Once admin has configured the Delivery Date from the backend, the customers will get the delivery date option according to that configuration. If the admin has set the Delivery restriction option that the delivery option will be enabled only when the min. order value exceeds a certain defined value (amount), the customers will get
- [Frontend Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/delivery-date-configuration-2/frontend-configurations/) - Select and configure the required options for Front End. Show delivery schedule in: Set ‘Calendar View’ to display the calendar and set ‘Time Slot View’ to display time slots for delivery date selection.
- [TimeSlot View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/delivery-date-configuration-2/frontend-configurations/timeslot-view/) - You can display the Delivery Date selection as a TimeSlot View. [1] You can manage the following options to display the Delivery Date as TimeSlot View: - Make Delivery Date Mandatory: Set ‘Yes’ to make the delivery date as a required field. But if you select No for the Make Delivery date
- [Activity Tracking](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/live-user-tracking/activity-tracking/) - By clicking on the ‘Live User Tracking’, you will navigate to the Activity Tracking. [1] Select the user(s) from the User list and select the date on which you want to check the visited location. You will get the Map & Timeline View to check the tracking on the map and the selected
- [SPF (Shortest Path First)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/direction/spf-shortest-path-first/) - If Route optimization is enabled from Configuration, then it will short the added routes with SPF algorithm. It can rearrange route according to their distance from each other. [1] [2] Note: If you have enabled the SPF from the Default Configuration, only then SPF algorithm gets applied on the route.
- [Email Route](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/direction/email-route/) - As you click on the ‘email’ icon, the Email page in CRM side will open with the link of selected route. You need to insert the account/contact details to whom you want to send the email. [1] [2] You can see the preview of the email. As per the preview, the route details will
- [Calendar View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/delivery-date-configuration-2/frontend-configurations/calendar-view/) - You can display the Delivery Date as "Calendar View". If you have selected the Calendar View, you can manage the following options: - Date Display Mode: Select the relevant mode to display the date. There are four different modes are provided: Calendar, Radio Button, Dropdown & Button. If you have selected Calendar to
- [Qualify/Disqualify Lead](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-options/qualify-disqualify-lead/) - By clicking on “Qualify Lead” icon, status of lead will get updated to close state and user will be redirected to opportunity page from the map. It is available only for record of lead entity. [1] Note: Open leads will display option to qualify/disqualify lead. Once leads are qualified, those leads will be shown
- [Delivery Date](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/delivery-date/) - From the Magento navigation pane, you will find the Deliver Date option there. Under the “Delivery Date” option, you can manage the Holidays and check the order details on the Calendar.
- [Admin’s (Magento) Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/admins-magento-dashboard/)
- [Enable Magento Switcher](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/backend-configuration-2/enable-magento-switcher/) - You can manually enable the store & currency switching. Manual Store Switching: You can enable/disable the Magento manual Store switcher. Manual currency switching: You can enable/disable the Magento manual Currency switcher.
- [Popup on Switching Store](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/backend-configuration-2/popup-on-switching-store/) - You can configure the popup to display when the customers switch the store. Prompt user to ask for switching store and currency: By selecting Yes to this option, the user will get the popup to switch store and currency as per the geolocation detected. Note: If you have selected No, this option will be
- [Block Visitors](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/backend-configuration-2/block-visitors/) - You can block the unwanted users or traffic to your store by entering the IP address(es) manually or selecting the country from the Country List. - Enable Visitor Blocking: Enable this option to block the users to your store. - Countries Blacklist: You can block unwanted users or traffic from any country. Select
- [Assign to Marketing List](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-options/assign-to-marketing-list/) - From the ‘Share & Assign’, you can Assign Owner for the selected record. You can assign any record to specific user or team by clicking on “Assign Owner” option from specific user’s details.[1] On clicking, you will have the option to add record either in existing marketing list or create the new one.
- [Manage Rules](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/backend-configuration-2/manage-rule/) - Navigate to Geolocation Redirect -> Manage Rules menu to configure the Store & Currency by selecting the country and the Store for that selected country. You will get the list of existing Geolocation Rules in grid view. You can edit any by clicking on the Edit option under the ‘Action’ column. From here, you
- [Assign Owner](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/map-view-options/assign-owner/) - From the ‘Share & Assign’, you can Assign Owner for the selected record. You can assign any record to specific user or team by clicking on “Assign Owner” option from specific user’s details. [1] Selecting Assign Owner option, it opens a dialog box where dropdown list of all the CRM users is provided
- [MaxMind Geolocation Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/backend-configuration-2/geolocation-redirect/) - Activation & MaxMind Geolocation Configuration After activation, navigate to the configuration option from Geolocation Redirect -> Geolocation Configuration. Activation: Select Yes to enable activation of the Geolocation. MaxMind Geolocation License Key: Please enter the MaxMind license key details to get the Geographical location of the user when they visit your web store.
- [Frontend View (Store View)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/frontend-view/) - As per the GeoIP Configuration and GeoIP Rules, your webstore will redirect the visitors accordingly. When your customers will visit the webstore, they will get the popup if you have enabled the Prompt user to ask for switching store option. By pressing Redirect button, they will be redirected to the webstore which is
- [Filter Rules & Actions](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/backend-configuration-2/manage-rule/filter-rules-actions/) - Filter Option When you are managing many stores at a time, the filer option is provided to search and view the Geolocation Rules based on the selection of Country, Currency, Priority, Status, and Exceptional IP & URL. After selecting the details for the filter, click on Apply Filters button, the Geolocation Rules will
- [Points to Note](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/points-to-note-3/) - You must sign up to MaxMind GeoIP to get the License key to get the Geolocation of the visitors. You can get sign up from here. GeoIP Rule can be set only for one store by selecting the multiple countries if required. But you cannot add new GeoIP Rule for the Web Store for
- [Geolocation (Backend) Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/backend-configuration-2/) - Geolocation Redirect- Backend Configuration Once you installed the module, the GEOLOCATION REDIRECT menu can see in the Magento navigation pane. From here you can Configure the Geolocation for the store, Manage Rules for Stores by selecting the Country with Currency and Analyze the Geolocation Data.
- [Refresh](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/advance-options/refresh/) - By clicking on the Refresh icon, the MappyField map and plotted records will refresh and load again.
- [Marketing List](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/map-view/advance-options/marketing-list/) - Marketing list contain the members like Account, Contact or Lead records. You can add the MappyField 365 data in any marketing list to market the specific segments more effectively. By clicking on ‘Marketing List’ icon under the “Select Entity” option, you will get the Add to Marketing List popup window. [1] You can
- [Geolocation Module Activation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/geol-installation/geolocation-module-activation/) - Get Activation Key Copy the activation key from the Order Confirmation Mail. OR Log into your account at www.appjetty.com using the registered email and password you have provided at the checkout process. Go to Downloadable Options and copy the activation key for the Geolocation Redirect extension. Insert Activation Key
- [General Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/delivery-date-configuration-2/general-configuration/) - Please follow the below steps to enable and configure the “Delivery Date Scheduler”. Go to Store -> Configuration. In the left column, you will see the tab AppJetty Extensions -> Delivery Date. Enabled: Select ‘Yes’ to enable the Delivery Date extension. The extension is disabled by default. Enabled at Admin: Select ‘Yes’
- [Delivery Date Related Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/delivery-date-configuration-2/delivery-date-related-configurations/) - Display At: Select page option on which you want to provide selection of delivery date. It can be either on the Checkout Shipping Page, on the Product Detail Page, or on the Cart Page. Checkout Shipping Method If you have selected the “Checkout Shipping Method”, configure the following options: Quota
- [Store View (Frontend)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/store-view-frontend/)
- [Delivery Date Activation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation-activation-dds/delivery-date-configuration/)
- [Installation & Activation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation-activation-dds/)
- [Delivery Date Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/delivery-date-configuration-2/)
- [About Delivery Date Scheduler](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/delivery-date-scheduler/delivery-date-scheduler-2/) - Introduction AppJetty provides an effective solution in the form of Delivery Date Scheduler which is helpful for entrepreneurs to easily deal with the order management process. An ideal extension for customers which allows them to select the date on which they want to receive delivery of the product. Admin can disable week off
- [View Map from Entity Menu](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/individual-records-on-map-view/view-map-from-entity-menu/) - The map options are provided in all the entities on the header. You can access the Map and Heat Map from the Entity. [1] By clicking on ‘Map’ or ‘Heat Map’, you will be redirected to the details of the Maps for that particular entity. [2]
- [MappyField 365 section in Record Details](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/individual-records-on-map-view/mappyfield-365-section-in-record-details/) - MappyField 365 is separately provided in the Details page of any record of all the mapped entities. Click on any record of account entity. [1] By clicking on the account name, you will get the summary and the details of that account and by scrolling down, you will get the separate ‘MappyField 365’
- [Installation Steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation-activation/installation-steps/) - > Manual Installation Installing Magento 2 extension by copying code Step 1: For Windows OS: Go to /app/code. Under that, create the folders using the following hierarchy: Biztech - Ausposteparcel For Linux OS: Enter the following commands keeping their order: cd
- [Extension Activation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation-activation/extension-activation/) - Copy an activation key Copy the activation key from the Order Confirmation Mail. OR Log into your account at www.appjetty.com using the email and password you have provided at checkout process. Go to Downloadable Options and copy the activation key for the ‘Australia Post Parcel Send’ extension. Activate the extension
- [Backend Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-end-configuration/) - Please follow the steps below to configure Magento 2 Australia Post Parcel Send extension. Go to STORES -> Configuration -> AppJetty Extension. Under that you will find the ‘Australia Post Parcel Send’ activation options. Here you can insert the activation key and select the required store/s.
- [Shipping Method Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-end-configuration/shipping-method-configuration/) - Account Number: Enter your Australia Post Parcel Send account number for the shipments. API Key: Enter your Australia Post Parcel Send API Key. Password: Enter the password for your Australia post Parcel Send account. Operation Mode: Test mode enables admin to use and test all features of the Australia Post Parcel Send
- [General Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-end-configuration/general-configurations/) - For the General Configuration, go to STORES -> Configuration -> SALES -> Shipping Methods. Note: Because of the ‘Store Pickup’ available, now onwards the Shipping Methods referred to as Delivery Methods in the 2.4 editions of the Magento2. Enable: Select ‘Yes’ to enable the extension. The extension will be disabled by default. Title:
- [Product Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-end-configuration/product-configuration/) - Select Attribute for Length: Choose the attribute for the product’s length. Select Attribute for Height / Thickness: Choose the attribute for the product’s height / thickness. Select Attribute for Width: Choose the attribute for the product’s width. Default Weight Unit: Choose the default weight unit for the product. Possible options are:
- [Return Address Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-end-configuration/return-address-configuration/) - Enter your warehouse address which is registered with Parcel Send and will be used when any order is returned.
- [Article Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-end-configuration/article-configuration/) - Signature Required: Default setting for 'Signature Required' on consignments. This default setting can be overridden while creating consignments. Possible options are: “Yes” or “No”. Note: If set to 'No', customers will be prompted to confirm that they authorize their delivery to be left if no one is available to sign for it, and then
- [Label Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-end-configuration/label-configuration/) - > General Label Printing Australia Post Branding: Choose whether the Australia Post branding should be included on the labels. If the admin is using purchased stationery from Australia Post, the generated labels should not include the branding. Default is ‘False’. Possible options are: “Yes” or “No” Label Left Margin: Use this field to
- [Manifest Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-end-configuration/manifest-configuration/) - Notify Customers on Dispatch of Manifest: Use this option to notify customers of tracking numbers when a manifest is dispatched. This default can be overridden when creating consignments. Possible options are: “Yes” or “No”. Australia Post Email Notification: Default setting for using Australia Post's email notification service on consignments. This default can be overridden
- [Consignment Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-end-configuration/consignment-configuration/) - Display Order Status on Consignment Grid: Set this option to ‘Yes’ to display the Magento order statuses for all the orders in the consignment view. Select: “Yes” or “No”. Choose the status to show in the consignment view: By default, orders that have a status of 'Pending', 'Processing' or have an open consignment against
- [Other Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-end-configuration/other-configuration/) - Change order shipping option: Select this option to change the order's current shipping option to other shipping options. Possible options are: “Yes” or “No”. Allow Front End Suggestions for Address: It will allow admin to display the city suggestions on in checkout page and multi shipping address.
- [Handling Fees Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-end-configuration/handling-fees-configuration/) - Calculate Handling Fee: This option lets admin add additional cost on the top of the original shipping rates. It can be set to Fixed or Percentage. Handling Fee: Enter the handling fee to be added to shipping charges. When the percentage option is selected, the amount entered in the “Handling Fee” will be considered
- [Place Order](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/australia-post-parcel-send/place-order/) - The customer will be able to place the order by inserting the required details and selecting shipping methods according to their requirements: Once the customer places the order, Admin will be able to see the placed order from the Sales -> Orders tab.
- [Consignment Management](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/australia-post-parcel-send/consignment-management/) - First, the admin needs to ‘Create Shipment of Order’ manually. For that, go to AUSTRALIA POST PARCEL SEND -> Consignment Management. In this tab, the admin will get a list of consignments with the following details: [1] Order #: The order Number of the Consignment. Ship to Name: Customer name who
- [Mass Actions](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/australia-post-parcel-send/mass-actions/) - From the Consignment Management, admin can easily perform the following “Mass Actions”: > Change Shipping Methods Click on the ‘Action’ dropdown option, here the admin can find the ‘Change Shipping Methods’ option. Admin can assign similar shipping methods to selected multiple orders. By selecting the ‘Change Shipping Methods’, the dropdown list of
- [Manifest Management](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/australia-post-parcel-send/manifest-management/) - Go to AUSTRALIA POST PARCEL SEND -> Manifests Management. Admin can have a list of manifests that are associated with the store. Admin will be able to see Manifest Code along with Date of Manifest Dispatch, No. of Consignments in the manifest & No. of articles in it as well. Admin can search
- [Article Type Management](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/australia-post-parcel-send/article-type-management/) - Go to AUSTRALIA POST PARCEL SEND -> Article Types. Now, a list of Article types that are created for the consignments can be viewed. To add a new Article Type, click on ‘Add New Article Type’ Now enter the Article Type Name, Article Weight, Height, Width & Length along with the status of
- [Assign Shipping Types to Charge Codes](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/australia-post-parcel-send/assign-shipping-types-to-charge-codes/) - Go to AUSTRALIA POST PARCEL SEND -> Assign Shipping Types. Now a complete list of Shipping Type can be viewed. From this module, admin will be able to assign the Shipping Types. To add a new shipping type, click on ‘Add New’ By clicking on it admin will be redirected to the ‘Assign Shipping
- [Contact Us](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/contact-us-4/) - We simplify your business, offer unique business solution in digital web and IT landscapes. Live Chat Get instant support with our Live Chat. Visit our product page at: https://www.appjetty.com/magento2-australia-post-parcel-send.htm and click on the Live Chat button for instant support. Tickets Raise tickets for your specific question! Send an email
- [Points to Note](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/points-to-note-2/) - Configuration settings like address, API Key Username and Password must be valid as per Parcel Send Account. Submit consignment to Parcel Send system after verifying all the consignments details To get contract rates, required services must be enabled in Merchant’s Australia Post Business Account. We will be using an intermediate database on
- [Australia Post Parcel Send](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/australia-post-parcel-send/)
- [M2_Australia Post Parcel Send](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_australia-post-parcel-send/) - Australia Post Parcel Send Version: 1.0.8 Compatibility: Community Edition 2.1.*, 2.2.*, 2.3.*, 2.4*
- [About Australia Post Parcel Send](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_australia-post-parcel-send/m2_australia-post-parcel-send/) - Introduction AppJetty provides effective solution in the form of Magento Australia Post Parcel Send Extension which helps store owners to submit consignment manifests to Parcel Send and generate labels for printing. Along with this, it also provides support for various Domestic and International shipping services under Australia Post Parcel Send. Customers can choose
- [Installation & Activation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation-activation/) - Mandatory Instruction: Kindly ensure that Magento 2 is set up correctly. Enter developer mode before initiating the installation. You can achieve the mode by running the following command: bin/Magento deploy:mode:set developer –s. It will enable the developer mode and skip compilation. You can enter default mode after successful installation of the extension.
- [Geolocation Analyze Data](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/backend-configuration-2/geolocation-analyze-data/) - Navigate to Geolocation Redirect -> Analyze to check the data with the details who visits your store. You will get the details of Redirection, Visitor’s Country, IP, Redirection Action with the Date, Block status. By clicking on the View Detail, you will get the Visitor’s details in summary. You can also navigate to the
- [Contact Us](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/contact-us-3/) - We simplify your business, offer unique business solution in digital web and IT landscapes. Live Chat Get instant support with our Live Chat. Visit our product page at: appjetty.com/magento2-geoip-store-switcher and click on the Live Chat button for instant support. Tickets Raise tickets for your specific question! Send an
- [Gelolocation Redirect Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/geol-installation/) - You can install the Geolocation Plugin in two ways: > Manually > via Composer
- [Installation Steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/geol-installation/installation-steps/) - Manual Installation (Installing Magento 2 extension by copying code) Step 1: For Windows OS: Go to /app/code. Under that, create the folders using following hierarchy: Biztech - Geolocation For Linux OS: Enter the following commands while keeping their order: cd
- [About M2_Geolocation Redirect](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/magento2-geolocation-redirect/magento2-geolocation-redirect/) - Introduction Ready to localize your customers’ shopping experience? Do it with AppJetty’s Magento 2 Geolocation Redirect plugin. It is packed with features of store geo-localization, flexibility in redirection, store security, and more. Our feature-rich "M2 Geolocation Redirect" enables you to offer your customers language-based localization and enhance their experience. Seamlessly broaden your business
- [Installation Steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation/installation-steps/) - Manual Installation (Installing Magento 2 extension by copying code) Step 1: For Windows OS: Go to /app/code. Under that, create the folders using the following hierarchy: Biztech ~ Auspost For Linux OS: Enter the following commands keeping their order: cd
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation/) - Mandatory Instruction: Kindly ensure that Magento 2 is set up correctly. Enter developer mode before initiating the installation. You can achieve the mode by running the following command: bin/Magento deploy: mode: set developer –s. It will enable the developer mode and skip compilation. You can enter default mode after successful installation of the
- [Label Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/configuration-2/label-configuration/) - You can manage configurations for the labels to be printed from ‘Label Configuration’ tab. Label Layout for Parcel Post: Select size of the label layout for Parcel Post from following: A4-1pp A4-4pp THERMAL-LABEL-A6-1PP Label Layout for Express Post: Select size of the label layout for Express Post from following:
- [Authentication Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/configuration-2/authentication-configuration/) - For Australia Post Authentication Configuration go to Australia Post Authentication Configuration. Operation Mode: Select the mode of operation. Account Number: Enter the account number provided by Australia Post Shipping for Shipment Tracking. API Key: Enter the API Key provided by Australia Post Shipping. Password: Enter the password provided by Australia Post
- [Article Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/configuration-2/article-configuration/) - You can set delivery related configurations from Article Configurations tab. Partial Delivery Allowed: Select ‘Yes’ to enable the partial delivery of the shipment. For Ex. If customer has ordered 10 items but only 5 are available, with Allowed Partial Delivery these 5 available items can be shipped to Customer. Authority to Leave: Select
- [Address Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/configuration-2/address-configuration/) - To configure address for Australia Post Shipping, go to Address Configuration and enter following address details: Auto Save Address Sender Name Address Name Address Line 1 Address Line 2 Address Line 3 Address Suburb Address State Code Address Postcode Note: On enabling the Auto Save
- [Other Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/configuration-2/other-configuration/) - To manage other configurations like country-related shipping configurations, go to Other Configurations. Ship to Applicable Countries: Select the countries where the shipping service will be applicable. Possible Options are: All Allowed Countries Specific Countries Ship to Specific Countries: On selecting ‘Specific Countries’, you can select the specific countries where shipping
- [Shipping Services Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/configuration-2/shipping-services-configuration/) - Click on ‘Shipping Services Configurations’ to configure shipping services for International & Domestic Parcel & Letter Services. Enable Domestic services for Parcel: Domestic service for a parcel can be configured from here either standard/expressed by selecting the domestic services to be enabled for the parcel. Enable International services for Parcel: International service for
- [Extension Activation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation/extension-activation/) - Copy an activation key Copy the activation key from the Order Confirmation Mail. OR Log into your account at www.appjetty.com using the email and password you have provided at checkout process. Go to Downloadable Options and copy the activation key for the Australia Post Shipping extension. Activate the extension
- [Shipping Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/configuration-2/shipping-configuration/) - Click on Shipping Method Configuration to configure basic configuration of Australia Post Shipping. You can configure following configurations: Title: Define Title which you want to get displayed in shipping method section. Method name: Enter method name for shipping method. API Key: Specify API Key provided by Australia Post Shipping (you can generate
- [Select Package type](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/configuration-2/select-package-type/) - Go to Catalog -> Products and open any product in edit view. You will find a new attribute ‘Australia Post Package Type’. It will have two options: Parcel Letter Select the most appropriate one, according to the weight of the product. Be careful here, any wrong selection will not display
- [Generate Shipment and Download Label](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/configuration-2/generate-shipment-and-download-label/) - To generate and download labels for any order, navigate to SALES -> Orders and select the order from the list of orders. [1] Now, click on the ‘View’ icon beside the particular order. By clicking on the ‘View’ icon you will be redirected to the ‘ORDER VIEW’ of that particular order. [2] Thereafter
- [Frontend](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/configuration-2/front-end-configurations/) - Live Rates Once your customer has added the products to the cart, he/she can view the live shipping rates from the checkout page. [1] Note: Shipping rates can be displayed as per the shipping configurations configured by the admin from the backend. Only the cheapest shipping rate will be displayed if the admin has
- [Points to Note](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/points-to-note/) - An API key is a must define for automatic reflection of changes that takes place in Australia Delivery Post rates. Merchant has to manually bind the three major attributes (properties) length, width, and height used in this extension with the relevant length, width, and height that the admin has given to different products for
- [LT-Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/lt-installation/) - You can install the LT plugin in two ways: > Manually > Installation via Composer
- [Contact Us](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/contact-us-2/) - We simplify your business, offer unique business solution in digital web and IT landscapes. Live Chat Get instant support with our Live Chat. Visit our product page at: https://www.appjetty.com/magento2-language-translator.htm and click on the Live Chat button for instant support. Tickets Raise tickets for your specific question! Send an
- [AppJetty Translator](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/appjetty-translator/) - By clicking on “AppJetty Translator” from the Magneto navigation pane, you can manage bulk translation and check the translation processes.
- [Mass (Bulk) Translation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mass-translation/) - You can also translate the content of the CMS pages, Static Blocks, Product Review, and Products, by selecting multiple records.
- [LT- Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/lt-configuration/) - Please follow below mentioned steps to configure the “Language Translator” extension. Go to Stores -> Configuration.
- [Product Translation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mass-translation/product-translation/) - Navigate to Catalog -> Products. You can translate the products in two ways: “for a specific store by filtering the store” or “for Multiple stores”. [1] > Using Filter option From the product listing page, click on the ‘Filters’ option to translate the product(s) by selecting a specific store. [2] After
- [Bulk Product Translation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/appjetty-translator/bulk-product-translation/) - To view the status of mass translations carried out by CRONs or Console go to APPJETTY TRANSLATOR -> Bulk Product Translation. > AppJetty Mass Product Translator Here, you can view a list of things translated by CRONs or CONSOLE to see what the mass translation was carried out with, along with translation
- [Manage Translation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/appjetty-translator/manage-translation/) - Go to AppJetty Translator -> Manage Translation to translate some of the content/strings by searching. [1] > Search String & Translate Enter any string you want to translate in the search box. [2] Click on the ‘Edit’ option of the string you want to Translate and translate into any of the Languages
- [Bulk Product Translator in Multiple Stores](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/appjetty-translator/mass-product-translator-in-multiple-stores/) - To view the status of mass translations for multiple stores, go to APPJETTY TRANSLATOR -> Bulk Product Translation in Multiple stores. [1] Here, you can view a list of all the translations for multiple stores that are enabled from Store -> You will get the status of the translation: ‘Pending’, ‘Success’, ‘Aborted During Cron
- [Newly added products](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/appjetty-translator/newly-added-products/) - To view the status of the newly added products, go to APPJETTY TRANSLATOR -> Newly Added Product Translation in Multiple stores. [1] Here, you can view a list of all the translations of newly added products as configured from AppJetty Language Translator (Store -> Configurations). [2] By clicking on View Detail, it will
- [Product details translation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/lt-configuration/product-details-translation/) - > Translate Product Details from one language to another You can translate the product individually. Go to Catalog -> Products and click on any product to translate it to any other language. [1] You can also translate all fields by clicking on a single button from the Top right corner. Click on
- [Translator Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/lt-configuration/translator-configuration/) - On the left side under the APPJETTY EXTENSIONS tab click on “AppJetty Language Translator”, you can see its configuration sections. [1] Enabled: Select ‘Yes’ to enable the Language Translator extension. The extension is disabled by default. Google API key: It is used to translate the data. (Note: Use this link to generate the
- [Extension Activation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/lt-installation/extension-activation/) - Copy an activation key Copy the activation key from the Order Confirmation Mail. OR Log into your account at www.appjetty.com using the email and password you have provided at checkout process. Go to Downloadable Options and copy the activation key for the Language Translator extension. Activate the extension Log
- [Installation Steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/lt-installation/installation-steps/) - Manual Installation (Installing Magento 2 extension by copying code) Step 1: For Windows OS: Go to /app/code. Under that, create the folders using the following hierarchy: Biztech - Translator For Linux OS: Enter the following commands keeping their order: cd
- [Language Translator](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2-language-translator/13465-2/) - Introduction Language Translator translates important content of Magento 2 ecommerce store to any language supported by Google APIs. Just integrate Google API with Language Translator and one can proceed. One can easily install and configure this extension in e-commerce store. With the use of this extension one can translate the product attributes and Meta
- [Content Translation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mass-translation/content-translation/) - Go to any of the respective pages that you want to translate and select multiple records. Then click on the ‘Actions’ option. From the ‘Action’ dropdown list, click on ‘Translate Selected (Pages/Blocks/Product Reviews)’. A list of languages will appear; select the language in which you want the selected attributes to be translated.
- [Content translation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/lt-configuration/content-translation/) - Go to Content -> Blocks and click on Select -> Edit to translate blocks of that page to any other language. Admin can change Block Content based on Store view. Translate Store Reviews to Any Language Go to Marketing -> User Content -> Reviews and click on any review to translate
- [Add a New Truck](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/asset-truck-management/add-a-new-truck/) - By clicking on the + New option from the header, you will be redirected to the “New Asset” page where you can add a new truck with the required details. You need to insert the required details for your truck asset. You need to insert the Hazardous Material that the truck would carry out
- [Non-Geocoded Records](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/geocode-records/non-geocoded-records/) - Navigate to the entity for which you want to get a non-geocode detail. For example, if you want to check the Non-Geo Coded records from the multiple records of an account entity, go to Sales -> Account. Click on Non-Geocoded Record button, it would show listing of all the non-geocoded records along with
- [Manually Geocode the Record](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/geocode-records/manually-geocode-the-record/) - Navigate to the record for which you want to manually set a geocode: Latitude & Longitude. You will get the Geocode as per your selection of view. Here you get the Geocode for “My Active Accounts”. If you have not selected any record, it will get Geocode for all the Records. [1] Ex.
- [Enable Check-In](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/entity-mappings/enable-check-in/) - You will get Check-In & Check Out options for all activity entities along with Add Notes and Attachment options. To enable the Check In option for the activities like etc., tick the Enable Check In option. By checking it, you will get the Check-In & Check-Out features for your activity.
- [Tooltip Attributes Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/entity-mappings/tooltip-attributes-configuration/) - You can make configurations related to what you want to display on ‘tool tip’ when anyone hovers on that record. For that, you can choose the attributes that you want from the dropdown list. You may also define display name of that attribute. By default, it is same as attribute name. All the selected
- [Relationship Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/entity-mappings/relationship-configuration/) - The selected relationship id from the Relation List and the name gets plotted as part of related records associated with a record. In ‘Relationship Configuration’, Default Relationship ‘radio button’ is given to display the Default relationship at the time of loading the record map.
- [Views Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/entity-mappings/views-configuration/) - You can select the view that you want to display on the map for particular entity.
- [Summary Card Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/entity-mappings/summary-card-configuration/) - You can make configurations related to what you want to display on summary card. For summary card of an entity, you can choose the attributes that you want from the dropdown list. Also, under aggregate method, you can define the way you want records to be summarized. It can be either sum or
- [Data Filter Attributes](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/entity-mappings/data-filter-attributes/) - Data Filter is provided on the Entity & its View record selection under the ‘Plot’ menu. You need to select the attributes to provide as Filter option. You can select maximum 8 data filter attributes. Select the required attributes for the Filter option from the Attribute drop down list and Insert the relevant name
- [Data Grid Attributes](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/entity-mappings/data-grid-attributes/) - From here, you can select the attributes for the data grid. When you plot any data in map or in heat map, grid data will be displayed according to attributes selected here. If ‘Display Full Address’ checkbox is checked in data grid, it will display records with full address. You can select maximum
- [Action Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/entity-mappings/action-configuration/) - For mapped entities, you can edit action configuration section where you can check/uncheck the action buttons according to your requirement. This will reflect on the tooltip card. Here, only those action buttons will be shown that can be changed. Default buttons will not be shown in this configuration section.
- [Attributes](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/entity-mappings/attributes/) - For mapped entities, further configurations can be managed like Attributes. It includes Detail Attributes and Category Attributes. ‘Detail attributes’ are the ones that appear on card upon clicking on ‘pushpin pointer’ icon. At max 10 attributes can be selected. ‘Category attributes’ are the ones that appear in dropdown for ‘category’ selection. You can
- [Contact Us](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/contact-us/) - We simplify your business, offer unique business solution in digital web and IT landscapes. Live Chat Get instant support with our Live Chat. Visit our product page at: https://www.appjetty.com/magento2-australia-post-shipping.htm and click on the Live Chat button for instant support. Tickets Raise tickets for your specific question! Send an email
- [Assign User Roles](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/setup-for-admin/assign-user-roles/) - To manage the user roles, navigate to Settings -> Security -> Users. Now select the users whose roles are to be managed and click on ‘MANAGE ROLES.’ [1] This will open a pop up to select roles. [2] The available roles for selection are AppJetty MappyField 365 Admin or AppJetty MappyField 365
- [Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/configuration-2/) - Please follow below mentioned steps to configure the shipping method of Australia post. Go to STORES -> Configuration.
- [About Australia Post Shipping](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_australia-post-shipping/m2_australia-post-shipping/) - Introduction Australia Post Shipping is helpful for merchants as they can use it for domestic and international shipping purposes. It provides functionality to post letters as well as parcels and automatically reflects any changes that take place in Australian Delivery Post rates. One can also calculate the rates for domestic and international rates as
- [Configure Languages](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/setup-for-admin/configure-languages/) - You can also configure language of your choice by clicking on Configure Languages button available on Setup page. Select the language from dropdown that you wish to configure your messages. Here, you need to add translations for the messages in the language of your choice. Click on Save button to save the
- [How to configure the Firebase?](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/setup-for-admin/live-tracking/how-to-configure-the-firebase/) - We must configure the Firebase for “Live tracking”. Follow the below steps: Go the Firebase website, open this link: https://console.firebase.google.com/ Here you need to add a new project by clicking on the + Add project. Give a suitable name to your project and click on Continue to configure the details. In
- [Live Tracking](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/setup-for-admin/live-tracking/) - You or a DynamicsCRM users can enable/disable the Live User tracking feature from configuration to track the CRM users (team members). You need to configure Firebase details for User’s Live Tracking in MappyField 365: > API Key > Database URL > Storage Bucket > APP ID > Authentication Domain > Project ID >
- [Default Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mappyfield-365-configurations/setup-for-admin/default-configurations/) - Under “Default Configuration” option, set default Latitude, Longitude and Zoom level for map when it is opened for the first time. You can set the default location using the map as well by clicking on “Set latitude, longitude and zoom level on map” option available on the right-hand corner. [1] By clicking on
- [Recently Viewed Products](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/recently-viewed-products/) - Introduction Sometimes the customers skip or forget the product that they have recently visited. By browsing many products at a time it is possible to miss out on products that they were thinking to buy it. Shopify CommerceXpand – “Recently Viewed Products” app helps the customers to view the products they’d recently visited.
- [Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/facebook-messenger-chat/store-view/) - When the customers access your online store, they will see the live FB Messenger Chat as configured from the app integration. The customers can see the live chat popup only on those page(s) that you have selected from the app integration. The customers can see the live chat popup only on the desktop and/or
- [Chat Type](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/facebook-messenger-chat/live-chat-display-settings/chat-type/) - Live Chat You can show the live chat module in two ways: Live Chat and Messenger Page. If you select “Live Chat”, you need to choose the color to display the Live Chat module on the online store. Messenger Page If you have selected the Messenger Page as “Chat Type”, you can
- [Page Target](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/facebook-messenger-chat/live-chat-display-settings/page-target/) - You can decide on which page you want to enable the live chat module. - All Pages: By selecting this option, the live chat module will be displayed on every page. - Specific Page: By selecting this option, you can enable the live chat module only for the selected page. You need to
- [Device Target](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/facebook-messenger-chat/live-chat-display-settings/device-target/) - You can enable the live chat at the device level. You can enable the live chat only for those users who access the online store from Desktop (PC, Laptop) or access the online store from a Mobile device as per requirement. You can also enable live chat for both devices.
- [Greeting Messages](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/facebook-messenger-chat/live-chat-display-settings/greeting-messages/) - When the customers log in to the live chat from the online store, you can welcome them by showing the greeting message. You need to insert the message for the Login and Logout. - Greeting Message for Logged-in Users: Insert the message to show the customers when they login to Facebook Live Chat messenger.
- [Live Chat Display Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/facebook-messenger-chat/live-chat-display-settings/) - You can configure the display settings of the Live Chat module to show the customer in your online store.
- [Connect with Facebook](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/facebook-messenger-chat/connect-with-facebook/) - Facebook Page Configuration You must connect your online store with Facebook. You need to configure your store’s Facebook page by logging into the FB page. By clicking on the Connect With Facebook button, you will get the Facebook Login popup. You need to insert your store’s credentials and log in to Facebook.
- [Facebook Messenger Chat](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/facebook-messenger-chat/) - Introduction Sometimes customers want to contact you to know about the products, offers, and other queries on an immediate basis. Implementing the live chat module on the online store helps the Shopify Merchant to communicating instantly with the customers. So, you can increase sales through live chat using Facebook social media. Shopify-CommerceXpand provides an
- [Facebook Messenger Chat App](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/facebook-messenger-chat/facebook-messenger-chat-app/) - From the CommerceXpand dashboard, you will see the different apps for different purposes to manage your online store. If you want to enable the chat messenger to your online store, click on the Improve Experience section and find the Facebook Messenger Chat. By clicking on it, you will navigate to the “Integration” tab.
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/facebook-messenger-chat/installation/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify
- [CommerceXpand Apps](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/introduction/) - CommerceXpand: All-in-one Shopify apps About CommerceXpand Shopify-CommerceXpand is a number of Shopify apps in one for Shopify merchants to manage the backend operation related to the product management, abandoned orders, provide the discount with count down of the time, and many others. CommerceXpand is an all-in-one solution for many stand-alone
- [Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/hide-seo-products/store-view/) - The customers can search the products from your store from the “Search Product” and get the product in the search result. But if you have selected the Hidden option from the app backend, the customers cannot find the product in the search results.
- [Hide SEO Products App](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/hide-seo-products/hide-seo-products-app/) - From the CommerceXpand dashboard, you will see the different apps for different purposes to manage your online store. If you want to hide any product from the search results from your online store, you will find the Hide SEO Products app under the “Store Protection” section. By clicking on it, you will navigate to
- [Hide SEO Products](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/hide-seo-products/) - Introduction Most Shopify store owners want customers to search the products they’re looking for from the search results of their online store. But, sometimes being a Shopify store owner/admin, you need to hide some of the products so that they can’t be found in the search results when the customers try to search for
- [Select Discount Type](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/volume-discounts/volume-discounts-2/select-discount-type/) - After selecting the “Offer Type”, you need to configure the “Discount Type”. You will have four different options to set the discount on products: [1] - INR (Fixed Price On Each Qty): Select this option if you want to apply the “Fixed Price” discount on each quantity. - INR (Fixed Price On Total):
- [Select Offer Type](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/volume-discounts/volume-discounts-2/select-offer-type/) - You can configure the discount offer using different types: Variant, Product, Collection, and Cart. You need to select the type to apply the discount offer. Variant: You can provide a discount offer on the product’s different variants. You will see the two options by clicking on the “Variant”. [1] To apply the discount offer
- [Product, Collection & Cart](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/volume-discounts/volume-discounts-2/product-collection-cart/) - Product: You can provide a discount on the products. To apply the discount offer for all the products, click on the Select All option. But, if you want to apply the discount offer for the specific products only, click on the Custom Selection option. [1] By clicking on the + Add Product button,
- [Volume Discounts Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/volume-discounts/volume-discounts-2/) - From the CommerceXpand navigation panel, you will see the different apps with different purposes to manage your online store. You can manage any apps individually to manage your online store. Now, if you want to provide discounts on product purchases in bulk, you can configure and set up the offers in the “Volume Discounts”
- [Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/volume-discounts/store-view/) - Once the customers access your online store and navigate to the product’s detail page, they will see the volume discount tables as configured from the app backend. [1] Here, the customers will see discounts on minimum product purchases. If you have configured the cart custom message by inserting the liquid variables, the customers will
- [Number of Orders](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/volume-discounts/number-of-orders/) - Once the customers have placed their orders, you will see the number of orders using the different discount offers in the “No. of Orders” column from the Offer List.
- [Discount Table Design](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/volume-discounts/volume-discounts-2/discount-table-design/) - You can design the discount offer table that will be displayed on the product detail page. You can customize the discount offer table as per your store’s theme. Here, three sections are provided: Table Section Style, Table Header Cell Style, and Table Cell Style. Configure the appearance of the discount table by customizing the
- [Multi-level (tier) Discount](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/volume-discounts/volume-discounts-2/multi-level-tier-discount/) - You can configure the multi-level discount types in the discount offer. To add more levels for the discount type, click on the + Add Level button. You can configure the multi-level discount types in the discount offer. To add more levels for the discount type, click on the + Add Level button. You can
- [Create Volume Discounts](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/volume-discounts/volume-discounts-2/create-volume-discounts/) - To create a new volume discount offer or rule, click on the Create Volume Discount. You can add the details and configure the offer and discount types as per your requirement to increase your sales. Offer Name: Insert the relevant offer name to recognize the discount offer. This will be displayed in the app
- [Offer List](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/volume-discounts/volume-discounts-2/offer-list/) - You will see the list of the volume discount offers that are created. You can see the details of the offers in the grid view with details like current “Status”, “Offer Name”, “Offer Type”, “No. of Orders”, and “Actions” (Edit/Delete). - Status: You can enable/disable any offers by clicking the switch under the “Status”.
- [Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/volume-discounts/volume-discounts-2/settings/) - By clicking on the “Volume Discounts”, you will navigate to the Settings tab. Here, you can configure the store level settings and customize the cart message for the volume discount. Disable Dynamic Checkout Buttons: To enable the Volume Discount for your online store, you must disable the “Dynamic Checkout Buttons” on your store. By
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/volume-discounts/installation/) - Installation Steps Login to Shopify as Admin. Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand. After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, a ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. Insert your Shopify store link
- [Volume Discounts](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/volume-discounts/) - Introduction Shopify- CommerceXpand is all-in-one apps for the Shopify online store. CommerceXpand- Volume Discount app can help you create bulk discounts across your products in a few minutes. You can create price levels (tiers) for specific products based on the purchased quantity. You can configure the custom message on the cart to show
- [Store view](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/hide-dynamic-checkout-button/store-view/) - When the customers navigate to the store to browse and buy the products from your online store, they will see the “BUY IT NOW” button on the product detail page. By clicking the “BUY IT NOW” button, the customers will directly navigate to the checkout page. But, if you have enabled the switch of
- [Hide Dynamic Checkout Buttons](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/hide-dynamic-checkout-button/hide-dynamic-checkout-buttons/) - From the CommerceXpand dashboard, you will see the different apps with different purposes to manage your online store. If you want to hide the dynamic checkout button from the product details page, you will find the Hide Dynamic Checkout Buttons app under the “Fine Tune Store” section. By clicking on it, you will navigate
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/hide-dynamic-checkout-button/installation/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify
- [Hide Dynamic Checkout Button](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/hide-dynamic-checkout-button/) - Introduction Dynamic checkout buttons are an alternative to the “Add to cart” button for single products. Sometimes you need to hide or disable the dynamic checkout button from your online store. Shopify- CommerceXPand all-in-one apps enable you to hide the dynamics checkout buttons from your online store just with one click. You can
- [CommerceXpand- Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/introduction/commercexpand-dashboard/) - Once you navigate to the CommerceXpand Dashboard, you will get the analytics of “Image Optimizer”, “Bulk Editing operations”, and “available Emails”. Based on the records, you can check the availability of the actions performed and you can manage and keep your eCommerce store updated. You can also purchase extra plans: - Emails to
- [Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/recently-viewed-products/store-view-recent-prods/) - Once the customers visit the different products from your online store, they will get the image slider of the recently viewed products. (Screenshot-1) 1. The customers will see the “Recently Viewed” image slider as configured from the app settings. Here, The number of products will display as per the number inserted in the slider
- [Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/recently-viewed-products/settings-recent-prods/) - You will get the Recently Viewed Products app settings under the “Increase Conversion” tab. Click on the “Recently Viewed Products” to configure the settings to display the Image Slider of the recently viewed products on your online store. 1. Status: Click on the “Status” switch to enable the recently viewed product image slider.
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/recently-viewed-products/installation-recent-prods/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify
- [Product Review](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-review/) - Shopify CommerceXpand- “Product Review” app will allow the customers to add their experience of the products by adding the review on the store. The Product Review feature provides a way for your customers to engage with you, as well as each other to encourage sales The Shopify admin can filter the added reviews and perform
- [Setup- Manage Currency](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/currency-converter/currency-converter/setup-manage-currency/) - You need to configure the settings related to currencies. You can also enable the Currency selection as per the GeoLocation of the visitors. > Currency Formatting Setup You must configure the Currency Formatting and need to be verified. You need to copy the HTML codes for “HTML with currency” and “ HTML Without
- [General Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/cookie-bar/cookie-bar-settings/general-settings/) - You need to configure the following general settings for the Cookie bar appearance on your store: - Icon Visibility – Enable/disable the cookie icon on the cookie bar. - Only Show in European Union – If this option is disabled, the cookie bar will display globally (for all the countries). But if you
- [Switcher Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/currency-converter/currency-converter/switcher-settings/) - You can customize the Display and Color settings for the Currency Switcher widget. > Display Configure the Currency Switcher widget for how you want to display it in the store. The following setting options are provided: -> Display on Desktop and/or Mobile You can enable and display the widget on Desktop and/or
- [Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/pre-order/store-view-pre-order/) - When the customers visit your store, they can Pre-orders the desired products even before stocks are available or before launching the products in your store. The customers will get the Pre-Order widget & its option as you have configured from the CommerceXpand app. In this way, you can enable the Pre-Order option and continue
- [Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/scroll-to-top/store-view-scroll-to-top/) - Frontend View When the customers scroll down from the product, collection, or another page where you have enabled the Scroll To Top button, they will get that button to get back to the top. As the customers click on the button, they will navigate to the top and make the online shopping browsing
- [Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/scroll-to-top/scroll-to-top-settings/settings-scroll-to-top/) - You can configure the following settings for the Scroll To Top button: -> Button Settings ->Advanced Settings -> Distance -> Icon/Text Style -> Display -> Effects Button Settings From the Button Settings, configure the following settings: - Button Type: Select the button appearance and display the button
- [Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/inactive-tab/inactive-tab-settings/inactive-tab-settings-tab/) - 1. Message: Insert the eye-catching notification message that will appear when the customer leaves the tab and navigate to another. 2. Time After Customer Leave: Insert the time in seconds when the notification should start to display on the browser’s tab. 3. Select Favicon: Select the emojis/symbol that you want to display with
- [Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/count-down-manager/settings-count-down/) - You can enable/disable the Timer app (Count Down Manager app) on your store. You can decide the Timer as per the visitor’s timezone or display the timer by selecting the specific location. - Ignore Timezone ( Visitor’s Timezone): Keep this option enabled to display the Timer based on the customer’s (visitor’s) default time zone
- [General Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-bundle-intro/settings-prod-bundles/) - By clicking on the “Product Bundle”, you will navigate to the Settings page and configure the products as a bundle. First, you must enable the “Product Bundle” app to display the combo products on the product page of your store. Click on the toggle button to enable/disable (Yes/No). - Show Original Product Price: Tick the
- [Setup](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/currency-converter/currency-converter/setup-currency/) - You need to manage & configure the currency. You will get the two settings: -> Manage Currency -> Currency Settings
- [Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/favicon-cart-count/favicon-cart-count-configuration/favicon-cart/) - By clicking on the Favicon Cart Count, you will navigate to the Setting tab. Configure the appearance of the Favicon Cart Counter badge to display on the browser’s tab of the store view. 1. Shape: Select in which shape you want to display the badge- Rectangle or Circle. 2. Animation: Select the animation
- [Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/order-export/order-export-configurations/settings-export-order/) - Being a Shopify Admin (Merchant), you will be required to check the order status to deliver to the customers on time. It’s not possible to check the status of each and every order and export the orders manual all the time. By navigating to the Settings, you can auto-schedule exporting the orders and configuring
- [Settings- Export](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/order-export/order-export-configurations/settings-export/) - Export You can configure the medium to share the file of the latest orders as the Frequency (duration) is set. - Export Type: Select the required type of file to export the latest orders in it: CSV or Excel. - File Name: Insert a relevant FIle name that will be exported. You
- [Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/currency-converter/store-view/) - When the customers access your online store, they will get the Currency converter widget as you have set its position on the store. By clicking on it, the dropdown will open with enabled target currencies. (Screenshot-1) Note: > When Auto Switch By Location is enabled If you have enabled the Auto Switch
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/auto-external-links/installation-auto/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify
- [Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/auto-external-links/store-view/) - If you have enabled the “Auto External Links”, the new tab will open by clicking the specific labels, title, and images that contain the links. i.e. Products, Menu, Title, Product Category, etc. Suppose if the customers click on the product, the product details will open in a new tab. In this way, you
- [Enable Auto External Links](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/auto-external-links/enable-auto-external-links/) - Click on the Auto External Links app to enable the external links from your online store. Enable the switch of the Auto External Links and click on the Save button. This will enable the external links where the links are set for your online Shopify store.
- [Auto-External Links](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/auto-external-links/) - Introduction Shopify CommerceXpand – “Auto External Links” enables the external links for your online store to open in a new browser tab. External links help to prevent customers from navigating away from your online store. Key Points of Auto External Links - Navigate the customers in a new tab of the browser Prerequisites
- [Calendar 365 Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-installation-conf/)
- [Calendar 365- Installation & Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/) - Calendar 365- Installation & Configuration
- [Style Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/announcement-bar/announcement-bar-configurations/style-configurations-announcement-bar/) - The predefined themes are provided for the Announcement Bar. You can choose any theme to display any promotional message or any Free shipping message to the customers in the store. After selecting any template, you can configure the following options: Location On the screen: Set the visibility of the Bar on the store to
- [Setup- Currency Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/currency-converter/currency-converter/setup-currency-settings/) - You can configure the cart page settings and notification regarding the final pricing in the default currency. You can enable the option to notify the customers that “final pricing would be processed in the default currency on the checkout page.” By enabling this option for the customers who are on the checkout page, they
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/currency-converter/installation/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify
- [Currency Converter setup](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/currency-converter/currency-converter/) - Click on the Currency Converter app to configure the currency converter and the switcher for the online store. By clicking on the “Currency Converter”, you will find the settings to set up the following configurations: - Setup: Manage the Currency and the currency converter for the cart page. - Switcher Settings: Customize
- [Currency Converter](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/currency-converter/) - Introduction If you have spread your business and sales across multiple countries and if you have multiple stores for multiple countries, the visitors will need the option to see the displayed price in their country-specific currency. Shopify CommerceXpand- “Currency Converter” app provides a currency switcher widget to display the product pricing by selecting
- [Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/favicon-cart-count/favicon-cart-count-configuration/store-view/) - Once the customers added the products to the cart and pending checkout, they will get a badge with the counter of the added product(s). The badge will display as you have configured in the settings. It displays the effects if you have selected. So by enabling the Favicon Cart Count app, you will be
- [Integration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/favicon-cart-count/favicon-cart-count-configuration/integration/) - You need to integrate the ”Favicon Cart Counter” to enable and disable the badge on the browser’s tab of your store. You will get the status as “Not Created” if you have not integrated the code. You need to create a Snippet File by clicking on the Create Snippet File and the file will
- [Favicon Cart Count settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/favicon-cart-count/favicon-cart-count-configuration/) - The Favicon Cart Counter app will be found under the Increase Conversion. Click on the Favicon Cart Count app to display a small badge of the products’ counter that is added to the cart. The counter will be shown on the Store’s tab. You must enable the Favicon Cart Count app to display the
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/favicon-cart-count/installation/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify
- [Favicon Cart Count](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/favicon-cart-count/) - Introduction Sometimes the customers added the products to the cart but they were busy with other work or navigating to another web browser’s tab. So using Shopify CommerceXpand- “Favicon Cart Count” app, the Shopify merchant (admin) can enable the Cart Counter badge on the browser’s tab of the store view. When a customer
- [Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/best-seller-protection/store-view/) - Once the visitors access your online store, they might be competitors and check your best or highly seller products. Before the “Hide Best Seller” app, they can easily cross-check using the URL parameters or any code to the store’s URL. But if you have installed and enabled the “Hide Best Seller” app, it
- [Best Seller Protection](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/best-seller-protection/best-seller-protection/) - Click on the Hide Best Seller app to hide the Best Seller Products in your store. It will secure your high selling products in your store so the competitors will not be able to check the products from your store that are highly demanded. By clicking on the Hide Best Seller app, you will
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/best-seller-protection/installation-best-seller/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify
- [Best Seller Protection](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/best-seller-protection/) - Introduction Being a Shopify store owner, you do not want the competitors to be able to view the best and highly selling products and secure the products from them. You do not allow anyone to do competitive research on your store. Shopify CommerceXpand- “Best Seller Protection” app hides the best-selling products from your
- [Scheduler](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/order-export/order-export-configurations/scheduler/) - Navigate to the Scheduler to check the status of the export of the orders or the upcoming scheduler to export the orders. The orders that are already exported in the file and sent through Email or shared with FTP will be shown as Success. You will get the Schedule Date with the order count.
- [Settings- Schedule](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/order-export/order-export-configurations/settings-schedule/) - By clicking on the “Settings”, by default, redirect to the Schedule page. From the Schedule, you can configure the Frequency & Timings for exporting the orders. You can set the frequency for exporting the orders: Monthly, Custom Week Days, Daily, Hourly, or None. (Screenshot-1) > Monthly The orders will be exported on a
- [Export Orders](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/order-export/order-export-configurations/export-orders/) - By clicking on the Order Export, by default, you will navigate to the Export Orders tab. Here you will get the Orders listing as per the current date. > List View You will get the listing of the orders in the grid view with the details such as Order ID, Name, Financial Status,
- [Order Export configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/order-export/order-export-configurations/) - Click on the Order Export app to manage and analyze the customers’ orders in one place. Shopify Admin can schedule the order export and setup in which medium they want. By clicking on the “Order Export”, you can manage & configure the following options of the Order Export: - Export Orders: Get the
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/order-export/installation-order-export/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify
- [Order Export](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/order-export/) - Introduction Once the customers placed the orders, checking the order status and managing it is quite a challenging part especially if your work is manual. Shopify CommerceXpand- “Order Export” app will enable an automated process and streamline your order export processes with ease. Grab the latest orders from your online store and export into CSV
- [Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/announcement-bar/store-view/) - When the customers visit your Web store, they will see your announcement bar on the store as you have configured. (Screenshot-1) The announcement bar will appear as you have set the position on your store. i.e., If you have selected the ‘Sticky Top’, the customers will get the Announcement Bar even if they scroll
- [Announcement Bar list](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/announcement-bar/announcement-bar-configurations/announcement-bar-list/) - You will get the list of the Announcement bars with the details in the grid view. You will get the details such as Status, Name, Type, Created Date & Action options. Enable the required announcement bar by clicking on the Status (switch button). You can enable only one Announcement bar from the list to
- [Create Bar](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/announcement-bar/announcement-bar-configurations/create-bar/) - To display any announcement regarding the Free shipping, coupon code, new product launch, or any promotional offers, you need to create & customize the Announcement bar. There are two types for creating an Announcement Bar: Text Bar & Free Shipping Bar. Text Bar: You can simply add the Text message in the Announcement
- [Announcement Bar configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/announcement-bar/announcement-bar-configurations/) - Click on the Announcement Bar app to configure the banner of any announcement or any promotional offer to display to the customers when they visit the store. You must enable the app status On to display Announcement Bar to the Shopify store. By clicking on the “Announcement Bar”, you can “Create Bar” & manage
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/announcement-bar/installation-announcementbar/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify
- [Announcement Bar](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/announcement-bar/) - Introduction Informing the customers/visitors with a display bar on the web store is a simple and significant way to share any updates regarding any upcoming Sales, Product Launch, Coupon code, and Free Shipping banners. It is one of the ways to reach the global market and increase sales. Shopify CommerceXpand- “Announcement Bar” app
- [Security Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/security-settings/) - Introduction The ‘Security Settings’ is one of the all-in-one apps of AppJetty CommerceXpand that provides the functionality to detect the visitor’s location when they visit your store and redirect them to their region-specific URL. Under the Security Settings, Shopify merchants can block the Geolocation as per the country/state or specific IP address. Shopify merchants
- [Contact Us](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/contact-us/) - We simplify your business, offer unique business solution in digital web and IT landscapes. Live Chat Get instant support with our Live Chat. Visit our product page at: https://www.appjetty.com/dynamicscrm-all-in-one-calendar.htmand click on the Live Chat button for instant support. Tickets Raise tickets for your specific question! Send an
- [Resource Scheduler](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-views/resource-scheduler/) - “Resource Scheduler” option is only visible if you have enabled from the Settings. You can create the Work Schedule for the resources (users) and based on the available hours, you can assign the task.
- [Agenda View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-views/agenda-view/) - This view provides you an Agenda view of the calendar in which you can view a sequential list view with grouping options for other resources like accounts, contacts, facilities/equipment or users/teams or by date as per the requirements. In addition, you can view the calendar in Timeline View as per the Day, Week or
- [Timeline View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-views/timeline-view/) - This view provides you a Timeline view of the calendar in which you can view the simple sequential overview of the calendar- separated by day and the selection of the Users/Teams & Facility/Equipment in Resource Calendar and Accounts, Contacts in Customer Calendar. In addition, you can view the calendar in Timeline View as per
- [Gantt View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-views/gantt-view/) - Gantt view is used for viewing what activity is scheduled to be done at a specific day/time. Gantt view is a horizontal bar chart that visually represents an activity or task with the start and end dates. Gantt view in which you can view the Resources or Customers in top down manner and date range
- [Top Down View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-views/top-down-view/) - This view provides you a Top Down view of the calendar in which you can view a column per member on the horizontal axis and time on the vertical axis, and a plain view of activities. Members can be user/team, account, contact or facilities/equipment depending on choice selected by you. In addition, you can
- [Calendar Views](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-views/) - There are multiple views are given in the Calendar 365 to check the activities and as per the schedule.
- [Print Calendar](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-activities/print-calendar/) - To print the calendar, navigate to right hand side of the calendar and click on ‘Print’ icon. You can print the calendar in Portrait view as well as Landscape view in different formats like PDF, XPS Document Writer, directly fax it and save to Google Drive.
- [Unscheduled Activities](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-activities/unscheduled-activities/) - If you have enabled the Unscheduled Activates option from the configuration and the ‘Appointments’ and Service activities’ don’t have any required attendees and assigned resources, the Unscheduled Activities button will appear on the header in the Calendar page. It opens dialog box with list of Unscheduled Activities. This list comprises of two activities
- [Conflict Management](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-activities/conflict-management/) - On creating all the activities except Custom activity, if scheduling of any activity conflicts with the same activity it shows alerts only if enabled from the backend configurations. On clicking Ignore and Save button, activity gets saved but with conflicting error message on the activity. Clicking Cancel button, scheduling gets cancelled and you again
- [Share Activity](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-activities/share-activity/) - You can share the activities in which the multiple resources are involved. While creating the activities in which multiple resources are selected, the activity will automatically be assigned to the resources and those activities will be displayed in their calendar as well. In appointment activity, one needs to mention required and optional users
- [Recurring Appointment](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-activities/recurring-appointment/) - To create recurring appointment, select activity type as ‘Recurring Appointment’. After Inserting all the required details. Click on Set Recurrence button to set recurring details. By clicking on ‘Set Recurrence’ button, the pop-up named Set Recurrence will appear. Insert the details as below: Appointment Time: Select Start/End Time Recurrence Pattern:
- [Activity Summary (Workload)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-activities/activity-summary-workload/) - If you have enabled the Workload Report from the Calendar settings, only then you will get this ‘Report’ icon. By clicking on it, you can get the activities for the specific filter. You will redirect to the new Webpage named “Activity Workload”. You can filter & search the activities as per the Date selection
- [Search Activity](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-activities/search-activity/) - You can search any activity by three options: Subject, Regarding and Description that are inserted in the activities. Select any search option among three and click on search icon and it will show all activities with that keyword in the search text box. It will display only those activities that full fill search
- [Attachment for Activity](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-activities/attachment-for-activity/) - Attachments facility is given only for the Email, Appointment and Custom Activities. To add an attachment for the activity, you will find Attachment By clicking on + icon, Add Attachment popup will appear. Now choose the file to be attached as attachment and click on ‘Attach’ button. On clicking Attach button, attachment
- [Location selection](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-activities/location-selection/) - If location suggestions are active from the ‘Configurations’ page, you even get location suggestions based on keyword entered under location option. Note: Location option is enabled only for ‘Appointment’, ‘Recurring Appointment’ and ‘Service Activity’.
- [All day event for Appointment](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-activities/all-day-event-for-appointment/) - If the user is adding the “Appointment” activity, they will get an option to enable the All Day Event for displaying the appointment activity whole day. ‘Tick’ the checkbox of the All Day Event when you are adding the “Appointment” activity to set the appointment activity for all day. Every “all day” appointment
- [Create an Activity](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-activities/create-an-activity/) - To create activities, click on the date on the calendar that you want to add the Activity to. As you click on the Date, ‘Create Activity’ popup will be appeared on your screen: Activity: Select the type of activity you want to create. Subject: Enter the subject of the activity. Regarding:
- [Calendar Activities](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-activities/)
- [Calendar inside entity record](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-inside-entity-record/) - You can enable the calendar of the Calendar 365 for an individual CRM entity record. You will get the activities on the calendar inside the specific entity record from the DynamicsCRM backend side. For that you need to configure the Form and the web resources for the entity. You need to follow the below
- [Dynamic Date formats](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/resource-scheduler-manage-working-hours/dynamic-date-formats/) - You can manage the formats for Date from the Personalization Settings of the CRM.
- [Multi-language Calendar Labels](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/resource-scheduler-manage-working-hours/multi-language-calendar-labels/) - You can see the default CRM labels and Calendar365 captions in different languages based on the language settings in Personalization Settings from the CRM side and in the Settings from the Calendar365 side. Note: To display the labels & caption in the same language, you must select the same language on the CRM side
- [Set Regarding under Grid View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/activity-grid-view-of-calendar/set-regarding-under-grid-view/) - To set regarding for the records, select the records and click on Set Regarding button. This opens set regarding record dialog box to select record from the look up dialog box. After selecting click on ‘Save’ button to set regarding for the record. As you click on Save button, the popup message will
- [Activity Grid View of Calendar](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/activity-grid-view-of-calendar/) - To get list view of all activities, navigate to ‘list’ button on the calendar and along with that select time span from Day, Month or Year from the dropdown. By clicking on ‘List’ icon, the list of events will be displayed Day wise by default. You can change to Week or Month. List
- [Share Appointment Activity](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/save-and-share-calendar-views/share-appointment-activity/) - You can also share the appointment with other users (team members) at the same time when you are creating an Appointment activity. You can pre-select CRM records to share the Appointment activity with them when appointment creates. You can select the Required & Optional records from the activity configuration under the Calendar Settings to
- [Move Shared Calendar to Saved Calendar](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/save-and-share-calendar-views/move-shared-calendar-to-saved-calendar/) - You can move the ‘shared calendar’ to the ‘Saved Calendars’ list by clicking on ‘Move’ icon. Now you can see a shared calendar in Saved Calendars list. You can make it default if you want.
- [Share ‘Saved Calendar’ Views](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/save-and-share-calendar-views/share-saved-calendar-views/) - Clicking on shared icon, you can share Calendar with other CRM users or team. Clicking on ‘Share’ icon, opens dialog box to select user or team from the look up records box. After selecting user, click on Save button to complete the calendar sharing. You can select multiple users and teams to share calendar
- [Edit & Update Calendar](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/save-and-share-calendar-views/edit-update-calendar/) - On clicking ‘edit’ icon, you get to update calendar name and select if calendar is public or private. Click on Update button to update the changes made in calendar.
- [View Saved Calendar list](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/save-and-share-calendar-views/view-saved-calendar-list/) - Users can access saved calendar views by clicking on right icon that indicates the View Calendars. After you click on that icon, a dialog box opens with dropdown named “Calendar Views” to check and edit the Calendars from the list. Under the Calendar type, the user can check the ‘Saved Calendars’ and ‘Shared
- [Save and Share Calendar Views](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/save-and-share-calendar-views/) - You can also Save and Share any calendar view in Resource Calendar and Customer Calendar for future reference. Left panel Settings like selected resources, selected calendar view as well as, activities, selected status, priority, weekends and holidays get saved on saving view. You can save the calendar view on resource selection. If certain
- [Refresh](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-management/refresh/) - To fetch all the events or activities from the CRM, click on the ‘Refresh’ icon on the right-hand side of the calendar. Note: After changes in configuration, you must Refresh to view the applied changes.
- [Upcoming Events](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-management/upcoming-events/) - To view a list of upcoming events, navigate to ‘Upcoming Events’ section, from here you can select the type of view and view the upcoming events as per the ‘Day’, ‘Week’ or ‘Month’ format. Upcoming events will be displayed based on resource selected. Example: If account is the selected resource type, it displays
- [Owner wise Colorized activity](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-management/owner-wise-colorized-activity/) - If you have enabled the owner wise color option and set the specific color to different owners, the activities of the different owners will appear on the Calendar based on the Owner’s color. On the Calendar, user can see the colorized activities based on the selected color for the specific owner (users). e., the
- [Related Entities](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-management/related-entities/) - On selecting accounts or contacts as Customers, Related Entities dropdown is enabled from where user can select one or more related entity of account or contact related to which you want to view activities. Note: Related entities dropdown will be shown only if entities are selected from the configurations page. And activities will be
- [Calendar 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-management/calendar-365/) - To open the Calendar 365, following steps must be followed: Go to AppJetty -> Calendar 365 Here, you get two calendars: Resource Calendar & Customer Calendar. Resource Calendar: It is for User and Facility/Equipment. Customer Calendar: It is for Contacts and Accounts. If you want to manage activities for the
- [Calendar Management](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/calendar-management/)
- [Calendar View & Functionalities](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-view-functionalities/) - Calendar 365: “Calendar View & Functionalities” Version: 5.6 Compatibility: Microsoft Dynamics CRM 2016(v8.0) and above (online and on-premises) and PowerApps Browser Compatibility: Edge (v12) and above Firefox (v29) and above Chrome (v33) and above Safari (v7.1) and above Opera (v20) and above
- [Other Configuration for Calendar 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/calendar-365-installation-configuration/calendar-365-default-configuration/other-configuration-for-calendar-365/) - Multi-language Calendar labels You can select the different languages for the labels of the default CRM on the Calendar365. Navigate to Settings -> Personalization Settings -> select the Language From here, select the language for the User Interface in which you want to see the labels for Calendar 365. After selecting the
- [Order confirmation & detail page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/add-ons-with-magemob-app-builder/order-confirmation-detail-page/) - Order Confirmation Once the date and/or time is selected, it can be seen on the checkout page. (left image) Once the customer placed the order, they can see the scheduled deliver date on the Order Confirmation page. (right image) Order Detail page The customer can check the placed order details
- [Contact Us](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/contact-us/) - We simplify your business, offer unique business solution in digital web and IT landscapes. Live Chat Get instant support with our Live Chat. Visit our product page at: https://www.appjetty.com/magento-magemob-app-builder.htm and click on the Live Chat button for instant support. Tickets Raise tickets for your specific question! Send an
- [Points to Note](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/points-to-note/) - Products in all the modules of MageMob App Builder will only be visible if they are assigned to the website selected while purchasing the Extension. You can try our MageMob Mobile App Builder demo app from Play Store or App Store. App Store link: https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/magemob-cart-customer-mobile/id1039362898?mt=8 Play Store link:https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.biztech.magemobcart You will require
- [Delivery Date Scheduler](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/add-ons-with-magemob-app-builder/delivery-date-scheduler/) - Admin can purchase the “Delivery Date Scheduler” as add-on to provide the date and/or time selection to the user during the checkout of the order. Backend Configuration If you have purchased the add-on, you must have AppJetty’s Delivery Date Scheduler extension configured from the Magento backend. For that, navigate to Stores à
- [Zipcode Validator](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/add-ons-with-magemob-app-builder/zipcode-validator/) - Admin can purchase the “Zipcode Validator” as add-on to provide the functionality to the user to check whether product delivery in their own area is available or not. Backend Configuration If you have purchased the add-on, you must have the AppJetty’s Zipcode Validator extension configured from the Magento backend. For that, navigate
- [Add-ons with MageMob App Builder](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/add-ons-with-magemob-app-builder/) - AppJetty’s two extensions are compatible with the “MageMob App Builder”: Zipcode Validator and Delivery Date Scheduler. Being an administrator, if you are using the “MageMob App Builder”, you can also configure and use the functionality of the Zipcode Validator and Delivery Date Scheduler in the App Builder app. Admin must have purchased the
- [Deep Linking (Product Sharing)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/deep-linking-product-sharing/) - Sometimes Web links don’t work with native mobile apps. So, the ‘Deep Linking’ comes in the picture. Deep Links allows mobile app to push to a specific page within an app versus simply opening it. If two users have MageMob App Builder application installed on their phone and they want to share products
- [Firebase Analytics](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/firebase-analytics/) - Admin can track daily user engagement, device details of users, country location and crash analytics as well. If any user is facing any crash while using an application, then we can get idea from the analytics report and update the application if required.
- [Address Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/user-profile/address-page/) - User can add address to ship order by clicking on add button on top right corner. Here you need to define address details like street, city, postal code etc. User can also manage address by editing or removing saved addresses. User can also find address which they want to save on google map
- [Wishlist Screen](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/user-profile/wishlist-screen/) - User can manage Wishlist by adding & removing the products. The product is added in the Wishlist from the Product listing page or from the Product details page by clicking on Wishlist icon . You can add to cart by clicking on Cart icon . To clear whole Wishlist, tap on Clear
- [User Profile](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/user-profile/) - If user is logged in, the options related to User Profile will be appeared: (Left screenshot) > Wish List, > Orders, > Addresses . By tapping on ‘edit’ icon, User Profile page will be redirected. (Right screenshot) User can check own profile and update the details by tapping ‘edit’ button. By tapping
- [Product Review Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/orders/product-review-page/) - Here, you can see the list of reviews given by different customers for the product. It can also be filterer by Positive and Negative options. (Left screenshot) Write Review page will appear after completion of order. (Right screenshot) User can share review about purchased product by adding review for product and giving ratings
- [Track Order Listing Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/orders/track-order-listing-page/) - Logged in user can track the order by tapping on Orders in the Category slider. (Left screenshot) By tapping on Orders , users get a list of all placed orders with order status and tracking information. (Left screenshot) By tapping on any order, it will show details about delivery and other information.
- [Product Checkout Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/product-checkout-page/) - User can Check out shopping from the cart or directly tapping the Buy Now button from the product details page. (Left screenshot) Note: If the shipping address is not added yet or if you are a guest user, users will be redirected to Add New Address page. After saving the Address, users will redirect
- [Order Confirmation Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/orders/order-confirmation-page/) - It gives confirmation for placing order successfully and provide Order ID number to track order at the time of delivery. It also provides buttons to continue your shopping and view order which display ordered details. (Left screenshot) By tapping on View Order button, they will be redirected to Order Details page. (Right screenshot)
- [Product Detail Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/product-page/product-detail-page/) - Product detail page of any product display the product details with basic details like Product Name, Price, Ratings, Size, Color, and details with options Add to Cart and Buy now. (Left screenshot) As you ‘tap’ on the product from the listing page, it will redirect to product details page in which user can find
- [Product Listing Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/product-page/product-listing-page/) - Product listing page of any category displays the product details with basic details like Product Name, Price, Ratings, Wishlist and Cart. It can also sort by price low to high, high to low and filtered with different options like category, color, size, etc. by tapping on ‘Filter’ icon . (right screen) User can
- [Dashboard Screen (Home Page)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/mobile-app-frontend-view/dashboard-screen-home-page/) - After configuring the layouts in Manage Home Page Layout from Magento Backend, the dashboard screen will be displayed as per the configured sequence in Edit Layout from the backend. On the header, there are mainly navigation points in the menu: > Category Menu > Search Product > HOME icon > Notification icon > Cart
- [Preferences](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/mobile-app-frontend-view/preferences/) - Select Website: Under the Preferences, User can see the Website option with selected Website. User can change the Website by tapping on the Website option and select another website. (Left image) User will get the list of the Websites as per the backend configuration and tap on the website which he/she wants.
- [App Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/app-settings/) - User can manage various settings for the Magneto 2 store mobile application by clicking on Settings. From Settings page, user can manage the following things: (Left screenshot) Notifications: They can Enable/Disable the notification preferences based on which notification they want to get. Note: Enable/Disable the notification appearance only available in Android App. While
- [Login and Registration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/mobile-app-frontend-view/login-and-registration/) - MageMob Mobile App Builder allows user to login with registered email id and password. Another way to login with social media accounts like Facebook or On that page user need to enter email id and password of existing social media account. Skip: It also allows Users to visit app without registering themselves by
- [Edit Layout](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/magemob-app-builder-2/edit-layout/) - By clicking on Edit button of any Layout, you will be redirected to the “Edit Layout” page with different blocks displayed on the left side: > Featured Categories > Products Grid > Products Horizontal Slider > Banner Offer Slider > Recently Accessed Products There are 5 blocks provided to set layout of app.
- [Mobile App (Frontend View)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/mobile-app-frontend-view/) - Magento 2 MageMob Mobile App Builder is a mobile app extension that helps you to build a custom mobile app for your Magento 2 Store easily and quickly. Apps built with MageMob Mobile App Builder are optimized for both Android and iOS platforms and mobile responsive also. After configuring the MageMob App Builder from
- [Manage Home Page Layout](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/magemob-app-builder-2/manage-home-page-layout/) - Admin can showcase the products on the App’s dashboard by configuring various blocks from Magento Backend. Go to MageMob App Builder -> Manage Home Page Layout. You can manage and Add a new Layout. By clicking on ‘Manage home Page Layout’, already added Layouts will be displayed. You can manage home
- [Manage Notification](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/magemob-app-builder-2/manage-notification/) - By clicking on Manage Notification, list of Notifications which is already created will be displayed. You can create and manage the Notifications from here. You can Export all the notification details into a CSV/XML file along with searching for a specific notification. Users will get the notification on their app based on Notification
- [Installation Steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/installation-activation/installation-steps/) - Manual Installation (Installing Magento 2 extension by copying code) Step 1: For Windows OS: Go to /app/code. Under that, create the folders using following hierarchy: Biztech Magemobcart For Linux OS: Enter the following commands keeping their order: cd /app/code
- [MageMob App Builder](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/magemob-app-builder/) - Introduction AppJetty offers a mobility solution to your users in the form of MageMob Mobile App Builder and helps them to access your store and place orders through their mobile on the go. You must have extension for store owners, which allows their customers to place orders from their mobile. It is easy
- [Product Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/configuration-2/product-configuration/) - In this tab, admin can set default configurations for every product dimension and can also decide product weight unit to be considered. Select Attribute for Length: Choose the default attribute for length. Select Attribute for Height / Thickness: Choose the default attribute for height/ thickness. Select Attribute for Width: Choose the default
- [General Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/configuration-2/general-configuration/) - Go to STORES -> SALES -> Shipping Methods Here you can see AppJetty Australia Post Shipping. Note: Because of the ‘Store Pickup’ available, now onwards the Shipping Methods referred to as Delivery Methods in the 2.4 editions of the Magento2. In this tab, you can set basic configurations of Australia Post Shipping Extension.
- [Delivery Calendar](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/delivery-date/delivery-calendar/) - Navigate to Delivery Date -> Delivery Calendar to check the orders from the calendar view. You can easily check month-wise orders from the calendar view. You can check the previous month’s orders -> and next month’s orders ->.
- [Manage Holidays](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/delivery-date/manage-holidays/) - Navigate to Delivery Date -> Manage Holidays to add the upcoming holidays to manage the unavailable delivery dates. You can filter and search the specific holidays, you can change status of the holidays with multiple selection. Click on the “Add New Holiday” button to add a new holiday detail. Holiday Title: Insert the
- [Update Delivery Date](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/delivery-date-configuration-2/update-delivery-date/) - Customer can edit and update the desired delivery date for the order. As an admin, you can enable the Update Deliver Date option for the customers. Allow customer to edit delivery date: By selecting Yes, you can allow the customer to edit the selected delivery date once again and update the delivery date. Note:
- [Day Off Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/delivery-date-configuration-2/day-off-settings/) - Day Off: Select day when you don’t provide shipment, so customer can’t select that day. Single Day Off: Set and Disable single day offs (Festivals and national holidays). You can select date, month and year from the drop-down button as per required. Period, from-To: Set and Disable Dates for a given period. When
- [Time Slot Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/delivery-date-configuration-2/time-slot-settings/) - Label for timeslot view table: Default label that you would want to keep for timeslot selection. Add no. of Delivery days: Provide the no. of days for which you are going to provide delivery. Minimum interval of hours between the order placing time and delivery time: You can add the time interval in
- [Product Level Delivery Date](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/delivery-date-configuration-2/product-level-delivery-date/) - The following options are common for the “Checkout Shipping Method”, “Product Detail Page” & Cart Page: Additional Delivery Charge: Insert the additional delivery charge on order for a specific product. If you keep it 0 (zero) or empty, no additional charge for the selected product will be added. Order Processing Time: Insert the
- [Extension Activation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation-activation-dds/delivery-date-configuration/extension-activation/) - Get the activation key from the Order Confirmation Mail. OR Login to your AppJetty Store account then go to Downloadable options and copy the activation key for the Delivery Date Scheduler extension. Activate your extensions Log into Magento 2Admin Panel and go to Store -> Configuration -> Appjetty Extensions /Delivery date
- [Installation Steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/installation-activation-dds/installation-steps/) - Step 1: For Windows OS: Go to /app/code. Under that, create the folders using following hierarchy: Biztech Delivery Date Scheduler Deliverydatepro For Linux OS: Enter the following commands keeping their order: cd /app/code mkdir -p Biztech/Deliverydate mkdir -p Biztech/Deliverydatepro After this, find the
- [Orders](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/orders/)
- [Product Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/product-page/)
- [Installation & Activation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/installation-activation/)
- [M2_MageMob App Builder](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/m2_magemob-app-builder/) - MageMob App Builder Version: 1.0.7 Compatibility: Magento Enterprise Edition: 2.2.* to 2.4.* Magento Community Edition: 2.0.* to 2.4.* Device Compatibility: iOS: iOS 11.0 and above, Android: 4.4 KitKat and above (Pie)
- [Shopify Admin](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-review/shopify-admin/) - Auto-Publish & Email Notification > Manage Review: Auto-Publish or Manually If any customer has added a new review and you have selected the Auto-Publish option from the “General Settings”, you will get the status of the newly added review enabled in the Reviews listing. (Screenshot-1) But if you have selected the Don’t
- [Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-review/store-view-prodreview/) - The customers will get the Product review widget on the product of the product listing page and the product detail page. By clicking on the Product, the customers will navigate to the product detail page where they can check the Product Review widget and add reviews with rankings. The customers will get the
- [Products](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-review/product-review-setup/products/) - You will get the list of the Products with review details in the grid view. You will get the details such as Product Name. Total Reviews, Avg. Rating, and Action. By default, you will get all the products with and without review, but you can ‘Filter’ the Product listing as per the All Products
- [Reviews: 'Filter' options](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-review/product-review-setup/reviews-filter-option/) - > 'Status' wise Filter You can ‘filter’ the review listing as per the Status as below: - All Reviews: You will get all the reviews. - Published Reviews: You will get only the Published Reviews that are published by you or auto-published. - Unpublished Reviews: You will get only the Unpublished
- [Reviews: Quick Actions](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-review/product-review-setup/reviews-quick-actions/) - Quick Navigation You will get the navigation link of the product’s review page or product’s detail page just from the Reviewer Name details. (Screenshot-1) Review Actions You can perform the following options under the Actions to manage the Review: > Important (Flagged) Sometimes the customers added the reviews with some
- [Reviews: Publish/Unpublished](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-review/product-review-setup/publish-unpublished-review/) - Update Review Status Once the customers have added the review for the product and the Auto-Publish Review is disabled from the ‘Review Settings’, you need to publish the Review manually by changing the status of the review. Publish/Unpublish Review in Bulk You can update the status of the customers’ reviews to Publish
- [Reviews](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-review/product-review-setup/reviews/) - By clicking on the ‘Reviews’ tab, you will get the list of the product reviews in the grid view to check and manage/edit the reviews. 1. You will get the Review details like Status, Reviewer Name, Ratings, Feedback, Date, and Actions. 2. You can search for any review by inserting the Reviewer Name
- [Product Review Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-review/product-review-setup/product-review-settings/) - You will have 2-different settings to configure the ‘Product Review’: General & Review Card. General Settings You can configure the review publishing options under the General Settings as below: > Auto-Publish New Reviews: You can select the option of whether the review would be published automatically when the customers added the review
- [Integration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-review/product-review-setup/integration/) - By clicking on the “Product Review”, you will navigate to the Integration page, from here you must have integrated the Product Review app. For the first time, you will get the status as “Not Created”. By clicking on the Create Snippet File button, it will generate a (snippet) file to your active theme.
- [Product Review Setup](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-review/product-review-setup/) - Click on the Product Review app to configure the Review options to display on the store to the customers and manage the reviews that are added by customers. By clicking on the “Product Review”, you will find the following tabs to configure & manage the Product Reviews: - Integration: You must integrate the
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-review/installation/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify
- [Pre-Order](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/pre-order/) - Introduction If some of the most selling products run out of stock in your store, Shopify CommerceXpand- “Pre-order” app will help to collect the customers’ orders as pre-orders. If you are about to launch a new product, you can also start a sale in advance as Pre Order from your store that will help
- [Configuration at Shopify backend](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/pre-order/pre-order-configuration/configuration-at-shopify-backend/) - You must configure at the product level, to display the Pre-Order option on the product detail page. For that navigate to Shopify Admin and click on the Product. By navigating to the product details, you will find a checkbox as Continue selling when out of stock it means to continue the product selling even
- [Configuration (Themes)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/pre-order/pre-order-configuration/configuration-themes/) - You need to add the theme class name here if you have added the custom classes in the Themes from the Shopify backend. You need to add the Theme class name here to detect variant change events. If there are more than two classes, you need to insert a comma separator.
- [Products](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/pre-order/pre-order-configuration/products/) - If you have selected the Specific Products option under the ‘General’ settings, you will get the list of the products to select for displaying the Pre-Order option. You can select the products to display the Pre-Order option only for those products. By enabling the Pre Order Status, the Pre-Order option will appear on the
- [Pre-Order Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/pre-order/pre-order-configuration/) - Click on the Pre Order app to configure the Pre Order option for the out-stock product or Presales (new launching) products to display on the store. By clicking on the “Pre Order”, you will find the following Tabs to check & configure the Pre-Order: - Dashboard: You will get the analytics details of
- [Pre-Order Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/pre-order/pre-order-configuration/pre-order-settings/) - You will have 2-different settings to configure the Pre-Order for the product: General & Display. > General Settings You can configure the Pre-Order option to display the products by selecting a specific date range. - Pre-Order Tag: By enabling this option, the Pre-Order option will appear from the Shopify backend (admin side)
- [Pre-Order Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/pre-order/pre-order-configuration/pre-order-dashboard/) - By clicking on the “Pre-Order”, you will navigate to the Dashboard page, from here you can see the analytics regarding Pre-Order details. You will get the records of Dashboard analytics based on the Dates selection. > Dashboard Analytics There are 4-Dashboard Analytics are provided: - Pre-Orders: It displays the numeric of the
- [Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/cookie-bar/store-view-cookie/) - When the visitors access your store and they have visited for the first time, they will get the cookie bar as you have configured from the CommerceXpand app. If the visitors/customers click on the I Accept button, they will not get the Cookie bar popup for one year. In this way, you
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/pre-order/installation-preorder/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify
- [Cookie Bar Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/cookie-bar/cookie-bar-settings/) - Click on the Cookie Bar app to configure the Cookie popup bar details that will appear on websites when a user visits the site for the first time. By clicking on the “Cookie Bar”, you will find the settings to configure the Cookie popup bar as follow: - Enable Cookie Bar: You must
- [Cookie Bar](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/cookie-bar/) - Introduction Website Cookies are generally used for remembering the data and setting the data preferences. Shopify CommerceXpand- “Cookie Bar” app provides a professional-looking Cookie popup bar (banner) each time new visitors arrive at the store, informing them that you are using cookies. Once the customer agrees to the terms the Cookie popup bar will
- [Color Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/cookie-bar/cookie-bar-settings/color-settings/) - You can customize the colors combination of the cookie bar for the text & background: To choose the desired or relevant color, the Custom Color picker is provided. You also directly add the Color code if you have. - Icon – Choose the color for the Cookie icon. - Text – Choose
- [Text Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/cookie-bar/cookie-bar-settings/text-settings/) - You can customize the following text configuration to display on the Cookie popup bar with button labels. - Message: Insert the custom message about the cookie. - Dismiss Button Label: Insert the text caption that will accept the cookie and hide the cookie bar. - Cookie Policy Label: Insert the text caption
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/cookie-bar/installation-cookiebar/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify
- [Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/inactive-tab/inactive-tab-settings/store-view-inactive-tab/) - Frontend View When the customers leave your online store and access any link on another tab, they will get the notification alert on the title of the browser’s tab. If you have set a favicon & selected any effects, the notification will appear on the browser’s title and the customers will get an
- [Inactive Tab Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/inactive-tab/inactive-tab-settings/) - Click on the Inactive Tab to configure the custom alert message to display on the title bar of the online store tab (browser’s tab) to the customers. By clicking on the “Inactive Tab”, you will find the configurations to display the custom alert message on the title of the browser’s tab. - INACTIVE TAB:
- [Inactive Tab](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/inactive-tab/) - Introduction CommerceXpand “Inactive Tab” app allows the Shopify merchant to configure a changing title by showing a flickering emoji and apply various animations. So, when the customers leave the online store and navigate to another browser’s tab for some reason, they will get a notification to remind them. Benefits of Abandoned Checkout
- [Scroll To Top](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/scroll-to-top/) - Introduction CommerceXpand- Scroll to Top app customers can browse products/ a page to the bottom of the page and then immediately go back to the top by clicking on the button that is enabled by the Shopify merchant to the store. Having a “Scroll to top'' button creates a happy browsing experience of your
- [Scroll To Top Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/scroll-to-top/scroll-to-top-settings/) - Click on the Scroll To Top app to configure Scroll To Top options to display on the store to allow customers back to the top just by clicking on that button. By clicking on the “Scroll To Top”, you will find the settings to provide the Scroll To Top button to the customers by
- [Installtion](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/scroll-to-top/installtion-scroll-to-top/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify store link and click
- [Installtion](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/inactive-tab/installation-inactive-tab/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify store link and click
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/security-settings/7689-2/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify store link and click
- [Content Secure](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/security-settings/security-settings-apps/content-secure/) - From the "Content Secure → Settings", you can protect the store’s content from theft by configuring the right-clicking options and other settings as well. By clicking on the Content Secure, you can enable/disable the options of content privacy & security for your website (store). You can manage the Content Security options for the Desktop Settings
- [GeoIP Redirect](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/security-settings/security-settings-apps/geoip-redirect/) - You can add the Redirection Rules as per country & state to redirect the visitors to their region-specific store’s URL or any other URL. The URLs are displayed with the specific domain based on the region (Country and/or State). (Screenshot-1) Configure Redirect URL & Region You need to add the Country if you
- [GeoLocation Block](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/security-settings/security-settings-apps/geolocation-block/) - You can block unwanted users or traffic to your online store by inserting the IP address(es) manually and selecting the specific states & countries. i.e., Suppose if you want to disable the online shopping from your store for a specific region, you can select the country and/or states under the Block Requests and block the
- [Security Settings Apps](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/security-settings/security-settings-apps/) - Click on the Security Settings to manage the store redirection and content security when the customers visit your store. By clicking on the Security Settings, you will find the following app configuration to manage the store’s security: - GeoIP Redirect - GeoLocation Block - Content Secure
- [Inventory](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/bulk-product-editor/examples/inventory/) - Step-1: Select the attribute & its value Select the “Inventory” as the main attribute and select the conditional attributes and the values to filter the products. After setting the conditions, click on the “Preview matched products” to get the products. Step-2: Preview Products as per the Conditions After clicking on the “Preview matched products”,
- [Product Type](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/bulk-product-editor/examples/product-type/) - Step-1: Select the attribute & its value Select the “Product type” as the main attribute and select the conditional attributes and the values to filter the products. After setting the conditions, click on the “Preview matched products” to get the products. Step-2: Preview Products as per the Conditions After clicking on the “Preview matched
- [Step-2: Preview Matched Products](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/bulk-product-editor/bulk-editor/step-2-preview-matched-products/) - By clicking on the Preview matched products from Step-1, you will navigate to Step-2 where you can preview the matching products. If there are plenty of products, you will get 20 records per page. By clicking on any product, it directly navigates to the product detail page so that you can check the product
- [Step-1: Set Conditions](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/bulk-product-editor/bulk-editor/set-conditions-step-1/) - By clicking on the drop-down option, you will get the list of the attribute details to set the conditions. Once you select the specific ‘attribute’, you need to select its condition (boolean condition) to decide what products you want to get or what products you want to avoid. Different attributes have different conditions to get
- [Bulk Editor](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/bulk-product-editor/bulk-editor/) - By clicking on the specific product’s attribute or clicking on the “Bulk Editor” tab, you will navigate to the ‘Bulk Editor’ page to set the conditions to products match. 1.Selection of the Product attributes. i.e., What attribute of the product do you want to update in bulk? 2.Set the Filter Conditions by selecting the attribute
- [Create Bundle](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-bundle-intro/create-bundle/) - Now, by clicking on the + Create Bundle from the ‘Product Bundles’ page or clicking on the Create Bundle tab, you can create a new Product bundle by selecting the products, applying the discounts, selecting the priority. - Bundle Name: Insert a relevant & eye-catching name of the Bundle. - Choose Bundle Products: By
- [Product Bundles](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-bundle-intro/) - Introduction Product Bundles is one of the all-in-one apps of "AppJetty CommerceXpand". It helps merchants upsell products to their customers by creating product bundles or product combos with discounts. By combining products in different combos, the customer would buy more products than one. By configuring the product bundles, the average order value (AOV)
- [Product Bundles Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-bundle-intro/product-bundle-configuration/) - After installation, you will get the Product Bundles app in your App list. Let’s configure and setup the Product Bundle by selecting the products and making one combo or bunch.
- [Customize Email](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/abandoned-checkout/customize-email/) - You can customize the email template with a Live preview of the email design, and the ‘Send test Email’ option is provided to check how the email will look. From the left, you can edit & design the content of the email and from the right, you will get the ‘Live Preview’ as you
- [Integration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-bundle-intro/integration-product-bundles/) - You need to add the file to display the ”Product Bundle” in your store. Until then you will get the status as “Not Created”. By clicking on the Create File button, it will create a file in the theme. Once the file is created, you will get the status as “Created”. You need to add
- [Integration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-in-stock-alerts/integration-bulk-product/) - You need to integrate the ”Back in Stock Alert”. Until then you will get the status as “Not Created”. By clicking on the “Create Snippet File” button, it will create a file in the snippet folder. Once the file is created, you will get the status as “Created”. You need to add the code
- [Brand Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/general-configuration/ui-content-formats-configuration-2/brand-configuration/) - Under the General Settings, you must select the “Yes” to manage the brands.
- [Slider Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/general-configuration/ui-content-formats-configuration-2/theme-options/) - Theme Options By clicking on the Slider Configuration menu, you will redirect to the Theme Option under the Flare Theme Builder configuration. You can set the configuration for the Slider to display on the front store as Banner/Offers, insert the Instagram access key to access the Instagram feeds, and Google Analytics Settings. Slider
- [Manage Theme Options](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-selection/manage-theme-options/) - There are three themes that are provided: Apparel, General & Card. Select the theme to load the predefined template for the selected store. You need to select the Store for which you want to apply the theme. By switching the Store, the “activated theme” can be seen for the selected Store. By moving the mouse
- [Footer Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/general-configuration/ui-content-formats-configuration-2/footer-configuration/) - Custom Footer By clicking on the Footer Configuration menu, you will be redirected to the "Custom Footer" under the Flare Theme Builder configuration. From here you can configure the Footer Settings to display on the Web Store. Color Variable Footer: Set the color effects for the Footer content. - Footer Top Background Color: To select the
- [Header Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/general-configuration/ui-content-formats-configuration-2/header-configuration/) - Custom Header By clicking on the Header Configuration menu, you will be redirected to the "Custom Header" under the Flare Theme Builder configuration. From here you can configure the Header Settings, Navigation, and the Search Options for the Web Store. Color Variable Header: You can manage all the color variables for the Header from here. -
- [Global Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/general-configuration/ui-content-formats-configuration-2/frontend-options/) - Frontend Options By clicking on the Global Settings menu, you will redirect to the "Frontend Options" under the Flare Theme Builder configuration. From here you can configure the appearance of the Web Store. You will get the following settings under Frontend Options: Theme Color, Button Color & Style, Form Inputs, Theme Font, Links, Ratings, Catalog
- [Flare Theme Builder](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/byi-web-to-print-store-2-0/) - Flare Theme Builder V1.0.0 M2 "Flare Theme Builder" of AppJetty helps organizations of all sizes build eCommerce websites with custom storefronts for their online printing business. It is easy-to-use and technologically advanced. After integration in the Magento backend side, You will get the THEME FLARE tab menu. From here you can design your
- [Mega Menu configuration under Page Layouts](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mega-menu/mega-menu-configuration-under-page-layouts/) - After configuring the Mega Menu sections by managing the Custom Items, Blocks & Menu Snippets, you need to configure and edit the Mega Menu content in the Page Layouts block. Navigate to Theme FLARE -> “Page Layouts” under the Theme Configuration section. You will get all the designed page layouts as per the selection
- [Mega Menu view in Store view (Frontend)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mega-menu/mega-menu-view-in-store-view-frontend/) - The customer can see the Mega Menu with different options that set from the page builder.
- [Contact Us Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/contact-us-page/) - You can design the “Contact Us” page using the predefined layouts. Navigate to “Manage Page Layouts” and add a new page or design the existing pages. By clicking on the Design action of the ‘Contact Us’ page, the contact us web page will open to design it. By clicking on the Block icon from the
- [Checkout Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/checkout-page/) - You can design the “Checkout” page using predefined layouts. Navigate to “Manage Page Layouts” and add a new page or design the existing pages. By clicking on the Design action of the ‘Checkout’ page, the checkout web page will open to design it. By clicking on the Block icon from the left, you can drag
- [Product Listing & Detail pages](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/product-listing-detail-pages/) - For the Product detail and listing page, the predefined layouts are provided to display the products and their details on your web store. For that, navigate to the “Manage Page Layouts” and add a new Page layout or design the existing page of the product details and listing page. You can edit and manage the
- [Banner](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/about-blocks/banner/) - Drag & drop the ‘Banner’ snippet to the Webpage to display the excellent products as banners. Edit Banner (Slider) By clicking on the ‘edit’ icon of the Banner block, the panel named “Banner” will appear from the right side. From here you can edit the existing Banner by clicking on the edit icon and delete
- [Header](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/about-blocks/header/) - Drag & drop the ‘Header’ snippet to the Webpage and it will replace the current one. Edit Header By clicking on the ‘edit’ icon of the Header block, the panel named “Header” will appear from the right side. From here you can enable/disable the Language Translator and Currency options to display on the Header. After
- [Page Blocks (Predefined Layouts)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/about-blocks/) - Edit the Predefined Blocks of the content from the web page. You can select the Templated based on the Web Store design. i.e. General, Cards, and Apparel. You can move the Block up-downside by the ‘Move Element’ icon. You can delete any unwanted blocks from the web page by clicking on the delete icon. Note: The
- [Page Layout Design](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/manage-page-layouts/page-layout-design/) - Choose a Template From here you can design the Home page by choosing a Template and design the Block elements with drag and drop functionality. Click on the Templates icon, you can see the three Themes under the Templates: General (Template 1), Card (Template 2) & Apparel (Template 3). Choose your required template for the
- [Mega Menu](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mega-menu/) - Theme FLARE provides the Mega Menu management that often used on sites that have a considerable number of Products with multiple Categories for users to navigate. Under the “Theme FLARE”, the mega menu provides menu customization to design the main menu in your desired way! Navigate to the Theme FLARE to configure the Mega Menu
- [Manage Menus](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mega-menu/manage-menus/) - After inserting the Custom items and creating a block using existing Category & Products or selecting the custom items, you need to manage the menu by selecting the layout of the menu. For designing the Menu layouts, the different snippets are provided. Navigate to the “Manage Menus” to configure the header menu with a
- [Theme Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/) - Under the Theme Configuration, you can manage and design the Page Blocks and manage the contents of the Blocks. From the Page Builder, you can select the Template among three templates for your Web store theme. The individual Blocks are provided to manage the content.
- [General Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/general-configuration/) - Under the “General Configuration”, you can add a new page or edit the existing page. You can configure the Web Page design as per the details you want to show on your web store and select the relevant theme for the Pages (Home/CMS). After managing the pages, you can configure the Color Variables for the
- [Manage Themes](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-selection/manage-themes/) - Navigate to THEME FLARE ⇒ Manage Theme and the Theme design configuration page will get open. It contains a grid with the available configuration scopes. To configure the design settings, click on the ‘Edit’ option of the relevant Store. Under the Manage Themes, you can configure the store-specific theme individually. To configure the design settings,
- [Theme Installer](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-selection/theme-installer/) - You can import the Magento data to the Theme FLARE if you want. For that navigate to the Theme FLARE -> Theme Installer. By clicking on the Import button, you can import all the preloaded data like predefined slider, brands, blogs, blocks, and testimonials for the Theme FLARE.
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/count-down-manager/installation-6/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand- Bulk Product Editor. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify store
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-in-stock-alerts/installation-7/) - Login to Shopify as Admin. Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand- Abandoned Checkout. After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. Insert your Shopify store link and click on Log in
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/bulk-product-editor/installation-5/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand- Bulk Product Editor. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify store
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/image-seo-optimizer/installation-4/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search for AppJetty CommerceXpand- Image & SEO Optimizer. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on that. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify store link
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-bundle-intro/installation-3/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search for AppJetty CommerceXpand- Sticky Add To Cart. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on that. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify store link
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/sticky-cart/installation-2/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search for AppJetty CommerceXpand- Sticky Add To Cart. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on that. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify store link
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/abandoned-checkout/installation-1/) - - Login to Shopify as Admin. - Search the AppJetty CommerceXpand- Abandoned Carts. - After selecting it, you will find the ‘Add App’ button, click on Add App button. - As you click on the ‘Add App’ button, the ‘Log in to your Shopify store’ pop-up will be prompted. - Insert your Shopify store link
- [Recovery Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/abandoned-checkout/recovery-dashboard/) - After installation, you will get the "Abandoned Checkout". By clicking on it, you will navigate to the 'Recovery Dashboard'. From the 'Recovery Dashboard', you will get the latest values related to Abandoned Carts and Recovered Carts with a percentage as per the selection of the dates from the ‘date filter’. Your Latest Numbers: The
- [Back in Stock Alerts Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-in-stock-alerts/back-in-stock-alerts-configuration/) - After installation, you will get the Back in Stock Alert app in your App list. You can review how many customers ask for notifying them when the products are available, configure the notify message, reminder form appearance, and Email template.
- [Back in Stock Alert](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-in-stock-alerts/) - Introduction When you are running out of stock it means you are losing the customers, & business. Back in Stock Alert makes it easy for customers to be notified when the stock is available. The ‘Back in Stock Alert’ is one of the all-in-one apps of AppJetty CommerceXpand that sends your customer alerts when
- [Count Down Manager Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/count-down-manager/count-down-manager-configurations/) - After installation, you will get the Count Down Manager app in your App list. Let’s create a Timer and customize the appearance for your store.
- [Abandoned Carts Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/abandoned-checkout/abandoned-carts/) - By clicking on “Abandoned Carts”, you can check how many carts are abandoned by the customers and send the recovery mail to the customers.
- [Bulk Product Editor Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/bulk-product-editor/bulk-product-editor-configurations/) - After installation, you will get the Bulk Product Editor app in your app list. Let’s configure and setup how to edit the Product details in bulk.
- [Image & SEO Optimizer](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/image-seo-optimizer/image-seo-optimizer-dashboard/) - After installation, you will get the Image & SEO Optimizer app in your App list. Let’s see how to configure and setup the Image Optimizer. You can check and configure the following options for SEO specific image optimization: Dashboard: View Analytics of the optimized images. Optimize Settings: Personalize the Optimization settings for ‘Alt Tags’ and
- [Sticky Cart Confgurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/sticky-cart/sticky-cart/) - You can manage the Sticky Add to Cart for the desktop and for the mobile view individually. You must have enabled the Sticky Cart. Let’s see how to configure and customize the Sticky Cart.
- [Abandoned Carts](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/abandoned-checkout/) - Introduction AppJetty Abandoned Checkouts of CommerceXpand provides the details of the pending and incomplete checkouts by the customers. The Shopify merchant can manage the ‘Abandoned Checkouts’ to recover the orders that are already added into the cart by the customers but somehow abandoned at checkouts. Abandoned Checkouts provides the functionalities of the automated
- [Store View (Frontend View)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-in-stock-alerts/store-view-frontend-view/) - If the product is sold out, customers will get the “Notify Me” button on that product detail page as you have configured and customized. By clicking on the, “Notify Me” button, a popup will appear where the customers can fill in their Email ID to get the notification mail when the product stocks are
- [Email Template settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-in-stock-alerts/customize/email-template-settings/) - You can customize the Email template with ‘Live preview’ of email design and the ‘Send Test Email’ option is provided to check how the email will look. You need to configure the following content to create an Email Template: Email Settings - Subject: Insert the mail subject that will be displayed in the Email
- [General](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-in-stock-alerts/customize/general/) - By enabling the first option, you can enable the option to send the Email automatically once the product is back in stock. By enabling the second option, you can enable the option to send Emails to all the subscribers when the variant of the product is available. Click on the “Save” button once
- [Customize](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-in-stock-alerts/customize/) - Once the product stock is available, you can send the mail to the subscribed customers. You can configure the Email General settings and customize the Email Template under the ‘Customize’ tab.
- [Content Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-in-stock-alerts/product-page/content-settings/) - Configure the Notification subscription popup content: - Header Text: Insert a content to display for the Header - Body Text: Insert the message regarding when you would notify the customers. - Email Address Label: Insert the label to display in the edit text. - Button Label: To subscribe the customers with inserted Email id. -
- [Product Form](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-in-stock-alerts/product-page/product-form/) - Customize the options to display on the product page when the product is sold out. You will get a real-time Preview as you configure the options. Button Appearance Choose how the subscribe form is presented: You need to select how do you want to display the notification details to subscribe for a reminder
- [Product Page](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-in-stock-alerts/product-page/) - You can customize the appearance of the Notify button under the Product Form and configure the content of the notify (subscription) form under Content Settings.
- [Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-in-stock-alerts/dashboard/) - By clicking on the “Back In Stock Alert”, you will be navigated to the Dashboard page, from here you can see the analytics regarding Back In Stock details. You will get the records of Dashboard analytics based on the Dates selection. - Total Subscriptions: It shows how many subscribers have opted for notifications for
- [Product List](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/back-in-stock-alerts/product-list/) - You will get the list of the products with their variants that are subscribed to when they are back in stock. You will get the list in a grid view. You can check the product details, current stock (inventory) with the last update, and Email status with the last Alert sent. You can ‘Search’ the
- [Store View (Frontend View)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/count-down-manager/store-view-frontend-view/) - The customers will get the countdown timer as you have configured and customized it.
- [Timer List](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/count-down-manager/timer-list/) - After configuring the ‘Timer’, when you click on the Save button, you will navigate to the Timer List page, or by clicking on the Timer List tab, you will be navigated to the Timer List page. You will get the list of the created Timers to display on the store with different offers or events
- [Timer Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/count-down-manager/create-timer/timer-configurations/) - Configure the Timer duration by selecting the Date & Time. - Start Date & Time: Select the date & time when you want to publish (enable) the Timer on the store. - End Date & Time: Select the date-time when you want it to disappear from the store. Once you configure the Timer, click
- [Style Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/count-down-manager/create-timer/style-configurations/) - Configure the appearance of the Timer by customizing the color combinations of the content: - Background Color: Choose the background color of the Timer widget. - Timer Background Color: Choose the background color of the timer countdown. - Button Background Color: If you have enabled the Button, choose the background color of the button.
- [Display Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/count-down-manager/create-timer/display-configurations/) - You can add the content to display on the message with Timer and enable the button as well: > Insert Timer content - Name: Add the relevant name for the Timer. i.e., Black Friday offers, Weekend sales, etc. - Message Before Time: Insert an eye-catching message before the timer that can attract the
- [Create Timer](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/count-down-manager/create-timer/) - By clicking on the “Count Down Manager”, you will navigate to the Create Timer page, from here you can customize the Display, its Style, and set the Date & Time to display on the store. Preview: You will get the Real-time preview as per the Display & Style configurations.
- [Count Down Manager](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/count-down-manager/) - Introduction Are your products selling? The Count Down Manager will solve the problem by creating urgency with a limited-time offer and increase sales. ‘Count Down Manager’ is one of the all-in-one apps of AppJetty CommerceXpand. Countdown Timer is a marketing technique to get the customers to make a faster decision on product purchase within
- [Sticky Cart](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/sticky-cart/) - Introduction Sticky Add To Cart of the AppJetty CommerceXpand provides floating ‘Add To Cart’ & ‘Quick Buy’ sticky buttons. Sticky Cart is one of the Shopify CommerceXpand all-in-one app extensions that provides a “Smart Cart Feature” to the store which Boosts Sales & Conversions with Sticky Cart. The purchase rate will increase as
- [Bulk Product Editor](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/bulk-product-editor/) - Introduction Sometimes managing an eCommerce store is time-consuming when it comes to editing and modifying the product details for multiple products. Bulk Product Editor is one of the all-in-one apps of AppJetty CommerceXpand. It will allow Shopify merchants to change absolutely all required product attributes and product variants by inserting the custom condition to
- [Image & SEO Optimizer](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/image-seo-optimizer/) - Introduction You may have hundreds or even thousands of product and collection images, as well as homepage banners and blog images for the Shopify store. Image Optimizer is one of the all-in-one apps of AppJetty CommerceXpand that will compress the images and manage the image data like Filenames & Alt Tag by configuring the
- [Examples](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/bulk-product-editor/examples/) - As the Product price is edited by selecting the relevant attribute value and setting the condition, you can also set conditions for the other product attributes.
- [Revert & Cancel](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/bulk-product-editor/view-tasks/revert-cancel/) - You can revert the bulk edited products any time by clicking on the ‘option’ icon and clicking on Revert to undo the edited products in previous details. If the bulk editing process is going on and if you want to stop the process because of any reason, click on the Cancel option to stop
- [View Tasks](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/bulk-product-editor/view-tasks/) - By clicking on the Start Bulk Editing Now button from Step-3, the matched product editing process will be started. Once the bulk editing process is started, you will navigate to the “View Tasks” page from where you can check all the bulk edited tasks. From the 'option' icon, you can ‘Refresh’ the status. You
- [Step-3: Edit Matching Products](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/bulk-product-editor/bulk-editor/step-3-edit-matching-products/) - Edit the matching products for the selected attribute (Price). Here you need to choose an option to edit and update the new price for the matched products. > Schedule Bulk Editing - By clicking on the Schedule Bulk Editing button, you will get the popup to schedule the bulk editing task by selecting the
- [Home](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/bulk-product-editor/home/) - By clicking on the “Bulk Product Editor”, you will navigate to the Home page and configure the editing of the products in bulk. You can Edit the following product attributes: -> Inventory -> Price -> Compared At Price -> Product Type -> Tag -> Title -> Vendor -> Weight Enable scheduled bulk editing: If
- [Running Process](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/image-seo-optimizer/running-process/) - By clicking on the Running Process, you can check the optimization process for the images. If the process is running, by clicking on the "Refresh" button, you will get the percentage of the status of the process. In this way, you can configure the Image Optimization Settings, perform the image optimization action for individual
- [Resync Asset & Articles](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/image-seo-optimizer/image-optimizer/resync-asset-articles/) - You need to resync the asset images (theme images) and article images (blog images) manually by clicking on the Resync Asset and Resync Articles buttons, respectively.
- [Image Types](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/image-seo-optimizer/image-optimizer/image-types/) - By default, you will get a list of all the types. You can sort the images and get the list of the images by selecting the following image type: -> Collection -> Products -> Blogs (Articles) -> Theme (Assets) You can also search the specific image by its 'title'. If you have selected the
- [Image Optimization in Bulk](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/image-seo-optimizer/image-optimizer/image-optimization-in-bulk/) - You can perform the specific optimization action by selecting multiple images. By selecting the multiple-image records, you will get the Bulk Action option to perform the optimization action in bulk.
- [Image Details](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/image-seo-optimizer/image-optimizer/image-details/) - You can also check the details of the image by clicking on the Detail button for the individual image record. By clicking on the Detail button, you will navigate to the Detail page of that specific image details. From the Image details page, you can see the following details: > Image Type > Status of
- [Image Optimization actions](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/image-seo-optimizer/image-optimizer/image-optimization-actions/) - Under the ‘Action’ option, by clicking on the down arrow you can perform the following operations regarding the image optimization: -> Compress -> Optimize Alt Tag -> Optimize Filename -> Restore Note: - You can perform just two operations for the “Asset” type images: “Compress” & “Restore”. The image “Filename” & “Alt Tag” will not
- [Image Optimizer](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/image-seo-optimizer/image-optimizer/) - From the “Image Optimizer” tab, you will get the listing of all the image types with optimization details in grid view. You can see the image with its type, title, and the following details from the grid view: -> File Name -> Alt Tag -> Compressed File with the percentage -> Action The
- [For File Name](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/image-seo-optimizer/optimize-settings/for-file-name/) - With image file naming, it could be descriptive and include keywords that may be relevant. > Configure the File Name options: -> Enable automatic file addition for new products: Enable this option to insert the ‘image filename’ as per the File name pattern when the new products are added. > Choose “Filename pattern” for Product
- [For Alt Tag](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/image-seo-optimizer/optimize-settings/for-alt-tag/) - Search engines such as Google look at ‘Alt tag’. If you use alt tags correctly, you can help search engines to find the images and display them in search engine results as well. Configure the Alt Tag options: Enable automatic alt tag addition for new products: Enable this option to insert the Alt Tags as per
- [Optimize Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/image-seo-optimizer/optimize-settings/) - You can configure the Alt Tag and Filename for the Products, Collections & Blog Posts. You can also enable the auto options for Alt Tag, File Name, and Image compression.
- [Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/image-seo-optimizer/dashboard/) - By clicking on the “Dashboard”, you will get the analytics of the “Image Optimizer”. You can see the “Total No. of action performed” for all the Images: -> Images Compressed -> Files Renamed -> Alt Tag Renamed -> Total MBs saved after compressing the images You can see the image optimization ratio in percentage
- [Frontend View (Store View)](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-bundle-intro/frontend-view-store-view/) - Once the customers access your store and click on the product that is already in the product bundle, the product bundle will load once they navigate to the product detail page. Here the customers will get the Bundle’s ‘Title’, ‘Message’, and discount calculation as per the Bundle’s configurations. The Price is displayed with a
- [Product Bundles- List View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/product-bundle-intro/product-bundles-list-view/) - You can check already created Product Bundles. By clicking on the “Product Bundles”, you will get the list of the existing Product Bundles with their details in grid view. In the grid view, you can see the Status, Bundle Name, Product bundle images, Discount Type & Priority as you have added the details during the
- [For Mobile](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/sticky-cart/quick-buy-button/7176-2/) - By clicking on ‘Mobile’, you can configure Quick buy action options and customize the style for the mobile screen. - Enable on Mobile Switch: You need to enable this option if you want to display the Quick Buy button for mobile users. - Position on Mobile: You can set the position of the Quick
- [For Desktop](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/sticky-cart/quick-buy-button/for-desktop/) - By clicking on the Desktop under the ‘Quick Buy Button’ tab, you can configure Quick buy action options and customize the style of the Desktop screen. - Enable on Desktop Switch: You need to enable this option if you want to display the Quick Buy button for desktop users. - Position on Desktop: You can
- [Frontend View](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/sticky-cart/frontend-view/) - The customer will get the sticky cart. By clicking on it, either they can navigate to the Cart page or directly navigate to the Checkout page as you have set. The customers will get the “Quick Buy” button on the product listing page and by clicking on the Quick Buy button, they can wil
- [Quick Buy button](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/sticky-cart/quick-buy-button/) - You can set the “Quick Buy” button on the product list page or product detail page to provide the customers a way to add the product into the cart quickly. You can manage the Quick Buy button for the desktop and for the mobile screens individually. You must have enabled the Quick Buy button. Let’s
- [For Mobile](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/sticky-cart/sticky-cart/for-mobile/) - By clicking on ‘Mobile’, you can configure sticky cart action options and customize the style of the Sticky Cart icon for the mobile screen. (Image: 1.Sticky Cart for Mobile) - Enable on Mobile Switch: You need to enable this option if you want to display the Sticky Cart for mobile users. - Position on
- [For Desktop](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/sticky-cart/sticky-cart/for-desktop/) - By clicking on the ‘Sticky Cart’, you will get the Sticky Cart tab for the Desktop. Under ‘Desktop’, you can configure sticky cart action options and customize the style of the Sticky Cart icon. (Screenshot: 1.For Desktop ) - Enable Desktop Switch: You need to enable this option if you want to display the
- [Recovery Scheduling](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/abandoned-checkout/recovery-scheduling/) - You can set up the mail scheduling of abandoned checkouts by enabling the automated Abandoned Cart recovery emails. To set up the automated abandoned cart recovery emails that send the incomplete checkout reminder to the customers automatically, enable the “Send recovery cart emails automatically” option. Once that option is enabled, you can set up
- [Recovered Abandoned Carts](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/abandoned-checkout/abandoned-carts/recovered-abandoned-carts/) - Once the customer completed the incomplete purchase process and made a payment, the ‘Status’ of the Abandoned cart records will be updated to the Recovered. Once the status is updated to the ‘Recovered’, you cannot edit that record anymore and the details will be updated on the “Recovery Dashboard” as well.
- [Send Email in Bulk](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/abandoned-checkout/abandoned-carts/send-email-in-bulk/) - You can send the mail by selecting multiple abandoned carts to the customers using the ‘Bulk’ action. By selecting abandoned cart records, the Bulk Send Email button will be enabled. By clicking on that button, you can send the reminder mail of multiple abandoned carts to the customers.
- [List view records](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/abandoned-checkout/abandoned-carts/list-view-records/) - You will get the list of records of the abandoned carts with details like ID/Email, its Date & Time, Cart Amt., Email Status, Status of recovery, Action button to send the mail. The search option is provided to search the specific order by inserting the ‘Order ID’ or ‘Email ID’ of the customer You can
- [Send Email](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/abandoned-checkout/abandoned-carts/send-email/) - If you want to send an Email of the reminder to the customer of their incomplete purchase process, click on the ‘send’ icon, the customer will get an Email of the incomplete purchase. On getting the mail, the customer who forgot the complete the checkout process, can continue with the checkout process and make payment
- [Manage Custom Blocks](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mega-menu/custom-blocks/) - You can add the custom block to display under the Mega Menu of the store (Frontend) either by selecting the products under a specific Category or by selecting Parent & Child list from the Custom Items. Navigate to the “Manage Custom Blocks”, to add the blocks under the Mega Menu. You can edit the Custom
- [Manage Custom Items](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/mega-menu/manage-custom-items/) - First, navigate to the “Manage Custom Items” to Insert the items by defining whether it is the title of the menu or any product name. Under the custom items, you can manage the individual items of the Mega Menu. Add a new custom item by clicking on the “Add New Custom Item” button. By clicking
- [Footer](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/about-blocks/footer/) - Drag & drop the ‘Footer’ snippet to the Webpage to display details and menus of the web store. By clicking on the ‘edit’ icon, you can manage the Footer details column-wise. You can edit the content and logos.
- [Brands](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/about-blocks/brands/) - Drag & drop the ‘Brand’ snippet to the Webpage to display the available brands. By clicking on the ‘edit’ icon, you will get the Manage Brands button that will redirect to the Mange Brands page.
- [Static Content](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/about-blocks/static-content/) - Drag & drop the ‘Static Content’ snippet to the Webpage to display how it works, steps, etc. You can 'edit' the text captions & labels directly from the Webpage content. After editing the block, click on the Save Page button from the upper-right corner.
- [Instagram Feeds](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/about-blocks/instagram-feeds/) - You can also add your Web Store’s Instagram profile on the Web page. You must get the Instagram access token key by registering the client ID. Drag & drop the ‘Instagram Feeds’ snippet to the Webpage to display the images/snaps from Instagram. After editing the block, click on the Save Page button from the upper-right
- [Newsletter](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/about-blocks/newsletter/) - Drag & drop the ‘Newsletter’ snippet to the Webpage to provide the subscription of the newsletter or any updates. You can add more than one Newsletter Block. You can edit the Newsletter Title & its Description. After editing the block, click on the Save Page button from the upper-right corner.
- [Testimonial](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/about-blocks/testimonial/) - Drag & drop the ‘Testimonial’ snippet to the Webpage to display the customers' reviews of the products. By clicking on the ‘edit’ icon of the Testimonial block, you can edit the Title and insert the No. of the Testimonial to be displayed. After editing the block, click on the Save Page button from the upper-right
- [Trending Categories](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/about-blocks/trending-categories/) - Drag & drop the ‘Trending Categories’ snippet to the Webpage to display the products that most checked and purchased by the customers. By clicking on the ‘edit’, the panel named “Trending Categories” will appear from the right side. You can enable/disable to display the Types of Trending: Best Sellers, New Products & Sales Product. You
- [Blogs](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/about-blocks/blogs/) - Drag & drop the ‘Blog’ snippet to the Webpage to display informative blogs, notes, or articles. By clicking on the ‘edit’ icon of the Blogs block, you can edit the Title of the Blogs block. After editing the block, click on the Save Page button from the upper-right corner.
- [Featured Products](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/about-blocks/featured-products/) - Drag & drop the ‘Featured Products’ snippet to the Webpage to display the latest/featured products. By clicking on the ‘edit’ icon of the Featured Products block, the panel named “Featured Products” will appear from the right side. From here you can edit the Title and insert the No. of the products to be displayed. After
- [Offer Selection](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/about-blocks/offer-selection/) - Drag & drop the ‘Offer Selection’ snippet to the Webpage to display the offers on the products. You can edit the text captions & labels directly from the Webpage content. After editing the block, click on the Save Page button from the upper-right corner.
- [Top Category](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/about-blocks/top-category/) - Drag & drop the ‘Top Category’ snippet to the Webpage to display the categories of different product types. By clicking on the ‘edit’ icon of the Top Category block, the panel named “Top Category” will appear from the right side. From here you can edit the existing categories Title, Link & Image. After editing the
- [UI & Content Formats Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/general-configuration/ui-content-formats-configuration-2/) - You can customize the default look and feel of the Web Store content and User Interface related settings by configuring the background color, text color, button color, relevant effects, font effects, and more.
- [Manage Brand Groups & Brands](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/manage-brand-groups-brands/) - Brand loyalty has a great impact on customer behavior. With the trust in a brand status, customers tend to search for their favorite brand’s products in a store, regardless it is an online one or a brick and mortar. Manage Brand Groups You can manage the Brand Groups to display the brands' group wise. i.e.
- [Manage Testimonials](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/manage-testimonials/) - All visitors are really interested to know what other shoppers think about your products and Web store and how they appreciate the store services, etc. By placing a testimonial, you will be able to show more user impressions of your store products. You can add and manage the Testimonials to display on your website. Navigate
- [Manage Sliders](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/manage-sliders/) - The slider is a powerful marketing tool that helps you create the sliders for Banners, Discount Offers, Sales, etc. Uploading colorful and high-quality images is a great way to enhance your site appearance. It makes your website more impressive, professional which could improve the experience of customers and encourage them to view banners as well
- [Manage Page Blocks](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/manage-page-blocks/) - You can add and manage the Page Blocks for different content block of the Web page. Content blocks are sometimes referred as static blocks, or CMS blocks. You can use them to display fixed information such as text, images, and embedded video, as well as dynamic information from a widget or that, originates in a
- [Manage Page Layouts](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-configuration-4/manage-page-layouts/) - The layout of each page in your store consists of distinct sections, or containers, that define the header, footer, and content areas of the page. You can design your own store using the predefined layouts and blocks! Navigate to THEME FLARE ⇒ Manage Page Layouts. Here the added page layouts can see. Add New Page
- [Manage Pages](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/general-configuration/manage-pages/) - From the backend, you can create a new page with details like multiple images, blocks, variables, and widgets. All of them are design-friendly for search engines that crawl the metadata of the page so that people can find you easily. Enable Page: You can enable/disable the Page as per requirement. Page Title: Enter the relevant Title of
- [Theme Selection](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/theme-selection/) - Theme Selection & Design Configuration A Theme provides the overall look and feel for a site. Understanding the page layout is crucial to targeting the correct markup for styling, organizing your content, and creating your site.
- [Backend Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/backend-configuration/) - Image Download with Watermark BYI designer tool lets your customers download an image of their product designs. You can set a ‘watermark’ option for all downloadable images. To set the ‘Custom Product Image Download’ with watermark configuration, go to Stores → Configuration → Custom Product Image Upload. Download Customized Product Image: To enable design download
- [Masking Category And Masking File](https://docs.appjetty.com/document/masking-file/) - You can create, upload, delete or assign masking categories and masking files from here only. You can add a Masking file by choosing a masking category and masking image that must be SVG file from Select Existing Masking. To select any pre-uploaded masking file, select its masking category from the Masking Category dropdown. The names

## Categories

- [Getting started](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/getting-started/)
- [Installation Guide](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/installation-guide/)
- [Product Designer Tool](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/product-designer-tool/)
- [Addons](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/addons/)
- [Customer Service](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/customer-service/)
- [Printing](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/printing/)
- [FAQs (Most Asked Question)](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/faqs-most-asked-question/)
- [General](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/general/)
- [WooCommerce](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/woocommerce/)
- [Front End](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/front-end/)
- [Shopify](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/shopify/)
- [Images](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/product-designer-tool/images/)
- [Mangeto](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/installation-guide/mangeto/)
- [WooCommerce](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/installation-guide/woocommerce-installation-guide/)
- [Shopify](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/installation-guide/shopify-installation-guide/)
- [Custom Integrations](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/installation-guide/custom-integrations/)
- [Text Elements](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/product-designer-tool/text-elements/)
- [Cliparts](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/product-designer-tool/cliparts/)
- [Background](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/product-designer-tool/background/)
- [Name and Number](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/product-designer-tool/name-and-number/)
- [Printing Methods](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/printing/printing-methods/)
- [Libraries](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/product-designer-tool/libraries/)
- [Product Templates](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/product-designer-tool/product-templates/)
- [Design Templates](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/product-designer-tool/design-templates/)
- [Configurable Products](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/product-designer-tool/configurable-products/)
- [Photo Album](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/product-designer-tool/photo-album/)
- [Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/product-designer-tool/installation/)
- [Photo Calendar](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/product-designer-tool/photo-calendar/)
- [Premium](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/premium/)
- [Product Designer Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/product-designer-tool/product-designer-configuration/)
- [3D Printing Process](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/3d-printing-process/)
- [Shapes](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/product-designer-tool/shapes/)
- [Web to Print Store](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/web-to-print-store/)
- [Magento](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/magento/)
- [Backend](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/backend/)
- [Product Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/category/product-configurations/)

## Knowledge Base Categories

- [Delivery Date Scheduler](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/delivery-date-scheduler/)
- [Installation Guide](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/delivery-date-scheduler/installation-guide-delivery-date-scheduler/)
- [Tips and Tricks](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/delivery-date-scheduler/tips-and-tricks-delivery-date-scheduler/)
- [Video Tips](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/videos/)
- [Calendar 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/calendar-365/)
- [MappyField 365](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/mappyfield-365/)
- [Tips and Tricks](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/calendar-365/tips-and-tricks/)
- [Tips and Tricks](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/mappyfield-365/tips-and-tricks-mappyfield-365/)
- [CommerceXpand](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/commercexpand/)
- [Magemob App Builder](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/magemob-app-builder/)
- [Tips and Tricks](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/magemob-app-builder/tips-and-tricks-magemob-app-builder/)
- [Language Translator](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/language-translator/)
- [Tips and Tricks](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/language-translator/tips-and-tricks-language-translator/)
- [Installation Guide](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/commercexpand/installation-guide-commercexpand/)
- [AJ Delivery Date](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/)
- [AJ Delivery Date & Shipping](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date-shipping/)
- [AJ GeoLocation](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-geolocation/)
- [AJ Zipcode Validator](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-zipcode-validator/)
- [Add-Ons](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/add-ons/)
- [Assign Delivery Date & Time Manually to Any Order from shopify admin](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/assign-delivery-date-time-manually-to-any-order-from-shopify-admin/)
- [Book a Meeting](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/book-a-meeting/)
- [Calendar View](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/calendar-view/)
- [Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/dashboard/)
- [Application Interface Overview](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date-shipping/application-interface-overview/)
- [Delivery Orders](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/delivery-orders/)
- [Benefits of AppJetty Delivery Date & Shipping](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date-shipping/benefits-of-appjetty-delivery-date-shipping/)
- [Book A Meeting](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date-shipping/book-a-meeting-aj-delivery-date-shipping/)
- [Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date-shipping/dashboard-aj-delivery-date-shipping/)
- [Introduction](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date-shipping/introduction/)
- [Frontend Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/frontend-store-view/)
- [Missing Orders](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date-shipping/missing-orders/)
- [General Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/general-settings/)
- [Order Item Listing](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date-shipping/order-item-listing/)
- [Introduction](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/introduction-aj-delivery-date/)
- [Manage Integration](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/manage-integration/)
- [Order Listing](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date-shipping/order-listing/)
- [Prerequisites & Installation](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date-shipping/prerequisites-installation/)
- [Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date-shipping/settings/)
- [Shipping & Delivery](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date-shipping/shipping-delivery/)
- [Widget](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date-shipping/widget/)
- [Manage Local Delivery](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/manage-local-delivery/)
- [Manage Location](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/manage-location/)
- [Manage Product Based Configurations](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/manage-product-based-configurations/)
- [Manage Shipping Profile](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/manage-shipping-profile/)
- [AppJetty Geo Location/Redirect](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-geolocation/appjetty-geo-location-redirect/)
- [Manage Store Pickup](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/manage-store-pickup/)
- [Manage Styles](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/manage-styles/)
- [Manage Zones](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/manage-zones/)
- [AppJetty GeoLocation + Currency Converter](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-geolocation/appjetty-geolocation-currency-converter/)
- [Plans](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/plans/)
- [Block Request](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-geolocation/block-request/)
- [Prerequisites](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/prerequisites/)
- [Contact Us](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-geolocation/contact-us/)
- [Currency Converter](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-geolocation/currency-converter/)
- [Currency Converter Setting](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-geolocation/currency-converter-setting/)
- [Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/settings-aj-delivery-date/)
- [General Configuration](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-geolocation/general-configuration/)
- [Shipping Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/shipping-settings/)
- [Introduction](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-geolocation/introduction-aj-geolocation/)
- [Prerequisites](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-geolocation/prerequisites-aj-geolocation/)
- [Redirect Popup](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-geolocation/redirect-popup/)
- [Redirection Rules](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-geolocation/redirection-rules/)
- [Store View (Frontend View)](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-geolocation/store-view-frontend-view/)
- [FAQs](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date-shipping/faqs/)
- [Dashboard](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-zipcode-validator/dashboard-aj-zipcode-validator/)
- [Front Store View](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-zipcode-validator/front-store-view/)
- [Installation Steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-zipcode-validator/installation-steps/)
- [Introduction & Prerequisites](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-zipcode-validator/introduction-prerequisites/)
- [Settings](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-zipcode-validator/settings-aj-zipcode-validator/)
- [Widget Menu](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-zipcode-validator/widget-menu/)
- [Zipcode Rule](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-zipcode-validator/zipcode-rule/)
- [FAQs](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-zipcode-validator/faqs-aj-zipcode-validator/)
- [FAQs](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/faqs-aj-delivery-date/)
- [Installation Steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-geolocation/installation-steps-aj-geolocation/)
- [Installation Steps](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-delivery-date/installation-steps-aj-delivery-date/)
- [FAQs](https://docs.appjetty.com/kb/aj-geolocation/faqs-aj-geolocation/)

## FAQ Categories

- [Developer Documentation](https://docs.appjetty.com/faq/developer-documentation/)
- [General Questions](https://docs.appjetty.com/faq/general-questions/)
- [Theme FAQ](https://docs.appjetty.com/faq/theme-faq/)
- [Wordpress Themes](https://docs.appjetty.com/faq/wordpress-themes/)